<<

Glossary of Stratigraphic Terms

The following glossary of stratigraphic terms includes terms that, at one or another, have been used in publications dealing with concepts and prin­ ciples of stratigraphic classification, terminology and procedure. The preparation of the glossary has been in the work program of the International Subcom­ mission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC) since before the first edition of the International Stratigraphic Guide was published in 1976, but its compilation had to be sacrificed for the sake of an early publication of the Guide. The prepa­ ration of a glossary of stratigraphic terms was an important part of the plan to re­ vise the first edition of the Guide. During the early stages of the preparation of the glossary, some thought was given to include in it only terms currently in common use. It was soon realized that it would be difficult, and a possible source of controversy, to try to deter­ mine which terms are in common use and which have received only limited use or have been abandoned; and that it would be useful to scientists to be able to find in the glossary the meaning and origin of terms no longer in use now but which they might come across in older publications. For these reasons, many terms generally considered useless, invalid, obsolete, ill-defined, or synonymous to terms in common use and terms that have attained no acceptance and that have been used only by their authors have been included in the glossary. An at­ tempt has been made, however, to differentiate the two groups of terms by showing those in more common use in larger type and those who have received limited or no acceptance in smaller type. Excluded from the glossary are terms that pertain to other geological fields, such as or tectonics, and adjectives such as synchronous, isochro­ nous, and heterochronous. An effort has been made to make the definitions of the terms as concise, and as free of qualifying statements as possible. For some, however, alternative definitions needed to be listed. Whenever possible, the original definition, the name of the originator or originators of the , and the appropriate references to the literature have been included for a more complete definition of the term.

105

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 106 Glossary

The definitions of terms defined and discussed in the various chapters of this Guide follow those in the text. A more complete glossary of biostratigraphic terms can be found in ISSC Report No. 5 (Preliminary report on biostratigraphic units, 24th International Geological Congress, Montreal, 1970). The third edition (1987) of the Glossary of of the American Geological Institute (R. L. Bates and J. A. Jackson, eds.) is recommended for definitions of terms that may have been left out of this glossary. Finally, the original plan for the preparation of a glossary of stratigraphic terms to be included in this edition of the International Stratigraphic Guide envisioned that the definition of each English term would be followed by its translation into several other languages. This plan had to be abandoned as it was found to involve a number of difficult problems, and would have delayed considerably the publication of this second edition of the Guide. It is hoped, however, that when, and if, this Guide is translated from English to other lan­ guages, the glossary will be likewise translated, and the equivalence of the English terms will then become available in the language of the translation.

A

Abundance zone. A consisting of a or body of strata in which the abundance of a particular taxon or specified of taxa is signifi­ cantly greater than is usual in the adjacent parts of the section, regardless of either association or range (see section 7.D.6.).

Acme zone. Equivalent to abundance zone (see section 7.D.6.C).

Acrozone. a. A term equivalent to “range zone” derived from Greek elements (R. C. Moore, 1957a, p. 1888) (see section 7.D.2).

b. A term equivalent to epibole (peak zone) (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Age. The interval of geologic time (geochronologic unit) during which the rocks of the corresponding or substage (chronostratigraphic units) were formed (see section 9.C.2 and Table 3).

Allo-correlation. Time-correlation between different units in different localities (Hen­ ningsmoen, 1961, p. 65-66).

Alloformation. The fundamental allostratigraphic unit (see allostratigraphic unit).

Allogroup. An allostratigraphic unit next in rank above an alloformation (see allostrati­ graphic unit).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 107

Allomember. An allostratigraphic unit next in rank below an alloformation (see al- lostratigraphic unit).

Allostratigraphic unit. A mappable stratiform body of sedimentary defined and identified on the basis of its bounding discontinuities (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 865-867).

Angular . An unconformity in which the bedding planes above and below are at an angle to each other, denoting either tilting or folding before and subsequent , or strong onlap (see section 6.B.2.a).

Arbitrary cutoff. An arbitrary boundary separating two laterally intergrading stratigraphic units that differ from each other in some arbitrarily defined way (Wheeler and Mallory, 1953, p. 2412).

Archaeostratigraphy, archaeostratigraphic classification. See ethnostratig- raphy.

Assemblage zone. A biozone consisting of a stratum or body of strata character­ ized by a distinctive assemblage or association of three or more taxa that, taken together, distinguishes it in biostratigraphic character from adja­ cent strata (see section 7.D.5).

Assise a. A term approved by the 2nd International Geological Congress (Bologna, 1881) for a next in rank below stage and equivalent to a substage.

b. A term suggested by P. F. Moore (1958) to replace the term “format” of Forgotson (1957).

Aurora (plural = aurorae), a. The time interval from the first appearance of a new phy­ logenetic stage (subspecies) until the first appearance of the next subspecies (Tan SinHok, 1931, p. 643).

b. A division of geologic time from the appearance of a mutant in a bioseries to the appearance of the following mutant (Glaessner, 1945, p. 225).

Auto-biotope. The total of all environments which one and the same taxonomic unit characteristically inhabits (van Morkhoven, 1966, p. 306).

Auto-correlation. Time-correlation of the same unit in different localities (Hennings- moen, 1961, p. 65-66).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 108 Glossary

Auto-thanatotope. The total area in which the dead specimens of one particular taxon are normally deposited (van Morkhoven, 1966, p. 309),

Auxiliary reference section. Equivalent to hypostratotype (see section 4.B.7.e).

B

Band. A thin stratum with a distinctive or color that is useful in corre­ lating strata (see Calkins, 1941).

Barren interval (barren zone). A stratigraphic interval without or de­ void of all diagnostic fossils or representatives of the taxonomic categories on which the remainder of the stratigraphic section is subdivided (see sec­ tion 7.C.8).

Barren interzone. An interval lacking in fossils between successive (Inter­ national Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 49)

Barren intrazone. An interval of substantial thickness without fossils within a biozone (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 49).

Baselap. A term describing termination of strata along the lower boundary of a deposi- tional sequence, used only where discrimination between onlap and downlap is dif­ ficult or impossible (Mitchum, 1977, p. 205).

Bed. A layer of or sedimentary rocks bounded above and below by more or less well-defined bedding surfaces. A is the smallest formal unit in the hierarchy of sedimentary lithostratigraphic units. Used com­ monly as a synonym of “stratum” and “layer” (see section 5.C.4 and Campbell, 1967, p. 12-20).

Bedded. Formed, arranged, or deposited in beds or layers or made up or occur­ ring in the form of beds.

Bedding. The arrangement of sedimentary rocks in beds or layers of varying thickness and character. Synonymous to layering.

Bedding plane. A planar or nearly planar bedding surface that visibly separates successive layers of a stratified section. The term is also used for bedding surfaces even when conspicuously bent or deformed by folding.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 109

Bedding surface. A surface, usually conspicuous, within a sequence of stratified rocks, representing an original surface of deposition; the surface of separa­ tion or interface between two adjacent beds of sedimentary rock. If the sur­ face is more or less regular or nearly planar it is called a bedding plane.

Beds. a. An informal term for strata that are incompletely known, constitute a lithologically similar , or are of economic significance.

b. A formal stratigraphic unit consisting of several contiguous strata of similar lithology (see section 5.C.4).

Bedset. Two or more superposed beds characterized by the same composition and sedi­ mentary structures (Campbell, 1967, p. 16-17, 20-21).

Biochron. The total time represented by a biozone; the absolute duration of a or flora or component parts of it (H. S. Williams, 1901, p. 579-580, 583; International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 48).

Biochronologic unit. A division of geologic time distinguished on the basis of biostrati­ graphic data (Teichert, 1958a, p. 113).

Biochronology. based on the of geologic events by bio­ stratigraphic methods or evidence (Teichert, 1958a, p. 103).

Biochronostratic unit. A chronostratic unit based on a biostratic unit (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 66).

Biochronozone. A representing the rocks formed anywhere during the time span of a biostratigraphic unit (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 869).

Biocoenosis. a. A group of organisms that live together and form a natural eco- logic unit.

b. An assemblage of fossils found in the same place where the organisms lived (see section 7.B.2).

Biocorrelation. See biostratigraphic correlation.

Biodatum. See biohorizon.

Bioecozone. A body of strata characterized by a certain paleoenvironment that is inferred from its fossil content and that can be distinguished from the paleoenvironment of adjacent strata (Poag and Valentine, 1976, p. 188).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 110 Glossary

Biofacial zone. A biostratigraphic zone that recurs in a single rock succession due to re­ currence of the environment in which the organisms represented by the fossil as­ semblage that characterize the biozone lived (Woodford, 1965, p. 164-169).

Biofacies (biostratigraphic ). The biostratigraphic aspect of a strati­ graphic unit or interval as portrayed by its fossil content (see section 3.A.13 and Weller, 1958, p. 622-623, 634-635).

Bioherm. A moundlike, domelike, lenslike, or reeflike mass of rock built up by sedentary organisms, such as corals, algae, mollusks, etc., and composed al­ most exclusively of their remains (Cumings and Shrock, 1928, p. 599; Cumings, 1930, p. 207; 1932).

Biohorizon. An abbreviation of the term “biostratigraphic horizon” (see section 7.C.4).

Biointerval zone. Equivalent to interval zone (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 60).

Biolevel. See biostratigraphic horizon.

Biomere. A regional biostratigraphic unit bounded by abrupt nonevoludonary changes in the dominant elements of a single phylum. These changes are not necessarily related to physical discontinuities in the sedimentary record and they are, or may be, dia­ chronous (Palmer, 1965, p. 149-150).

Bioseries. A morphogenetic sequence marked by stages in the progressive structural de­ velopment of morphological character of index fossils (Glaessner, 1945, p. 225).

Biosome. a. A biostratigraphic unit that is mutually intertongued with one or more bio­ stratigraphic units of different character; the biostratigraphic equivalent of litho- some (Wheeler, 1958a, p. 647-648).

b. A body of deposited under uniform biological conditions (Sloss, in Weller, 1958, p. 625); the record of a uniform biologic environment or of a biotope; a three-dimensional rock mass of uniform paleontologic content (see Weller, 1958, p. 625, 636).

Biostratic unit. A stratigraphic unit based on paleontologic data; an abbreviation of the term “biostratigraphic unit” (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 63, 68).

Biostratigraphic classification. The systematic subdivision and organization of

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 111

the stratigraphic section into named units based on their fossil content (see section 7.C.2).

Biostratigraphic correlation (biocorrelation). Similarity or correspondence in fossil content and biostratigraphic position between two stratigraphic sec­ tions (see sections 3.A.9 and 7.G).

Biostratigraphic horizon (biohorizon). A stratigraphic boundary, surface, or interface across which there is a significant and distinctive change in bio­ stratigraphic character (see section 7.C.4).

Biostratigraphic unit. A stratum or body of strata that is defined or characterized on the basis of its fossil content or paleontological character (see chapter 7).

Biostratigraphic zone (biozone). A general term for any kind of biostrati­ graphic unit. The fundamental biostratigraphic unit (see section 7.C.3).

Biostratigraphy. The element of stratigraphy that deals with the distribution of fossils in the stratigraphic record and the organization of strata into units on the basis of their contained fossils (see section 7.C.1).

Biostrome. A distinctly bedded and widely extensive or broadly lenticular, blan­ ketlike mass of rock consisting of, and built by, mainly the remains of sedentary organisms and not swelling into mountlike or lenslike forms (Cumings, 1932, p. 334; see Weller, 1958, p. 612-613, 636).

Biotope. The environment under which an assemblage of animals or plants lives or lived (Wells, 1944, p. 284; 1947, p. 119; see Weller, 1958, p. 614-615, 636).

Biozone. a. The range of organisms in time as indicated by their entombment in the strata (Buckman, 1902).

b. An abbreviation of the term “biostratigraphic zone” (see section 7.C.3).

Boundary-. A specific sequence of rock strata in which a specific point is designated that serves as the standard for the definition and recog­ nition of a stratigraphic boundary (see section 4.B.3). c

Casuzone. A biostratigraphic unit defined as a body of rock with upper and lower bound­ aries marked by reversible faunal changes that are essentially parallel to time planes (Vella, 1964, p. 622).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 112 Glossary

Causal stratigraphy. An approach to stratigraphic problems based on ecosystem analysis of interrelations between geologic events and organic (Krassilov, 1974, p. 170).

Cenozone. A term equivalent to “assemblage zone” derived from Greek elements (R. C. Moore, 1957a, p. 1888) (see section 7.D.5.C).

Cenozonite. An alternative term for assemblage zone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Chemostratigraphy. The element of stratigraphy that deals with the geochemical signals, such as cycles and isotope cycles, as recorded in the stratigraphic record.

Chron. a. An indefinite division of geologic time (H. S. Williams, 1901, p. 578,583).

b. The interval of geologic time (geochronologic unit) during which the rocks of a chronozone (chronostratigraphic unit) were formed (see section 9,C.8.a).

Chronocorrelation. See chronostratigraphic correlation.

Chronohorizon. An abbreviation of the term “chronostratigraphic horizon” (see section 9.B.4).

Chronolith. A chronostratigraphic unit (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2362).

Chronomere. Any interval of geologic time (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub- Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 82).

Chronomeric standard terms. The terms of the formal geochronologic hierarchy (Re­ port of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 82).

Chronometric unit. See geochronometric unit.

Chronosome. The body of rock enclosed between two markers that may approximate isochronous surfaces and so define the upper and lower limits of a single period of deposition within a basin. It is a special type of chronozone recognized primarily in subsurface practice (Schultz, 1982, p. 29).

Chronostratic unit. a. A stratigraphic unit with time boundaries (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 66, 75-79).

b. an abbreviation of the term “chronostratigraphic unit.”

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 113

Chronostratigraphic classification. The organization of the rocks of the Earth's crust into units on the basis of their or time of formation (see section 9.B.2).

Chronostratigraphic correlation (chronocorrelation, time correlation). Correspondence in age and chronostratigraphic position between two strati­ graphic sections (see sections 3.A.9 and 9.1).

Chronostratigraphic horizon (chronohorizon). A stratigraphic surface or in­ terface that is isochronous—everywhere of the same age. The terms “chronostratigraphic horizon” or “chronohorizon” are also applied to very thin and distinctive stratigraphic intervals that are essentially isochronous over their whole geographic extent (see section 9.B.4).

Chronostratigraphic unit A body of rocks that includes all rocks formed dur­ ing a specific interval of geologic time (see chapter 9, especially section 9.B.3).

Chronostratigraphic zone. See chronozone.

Chronostratigraphy. The element of stratigraphy that deals with the relative time relations and ages of rock bodies (see section 9.B.1).

Chronotaxis. Similarity in sequence with respect to age (Henbest, 1952, p. 310). Proposed as a complement to the term “homotaxis,” meaning similarity or equiva­ lence in stratigraphic position and sequence.

Chronotaxy. Equivalent to chronotaxis as originally proposed by Henbest (1952, p. 310).

Chronozone. A body of rocks formed anywhere during the time span of some designated stratigraphic unit or geologic feature. It is a formal chrono­ stratigraphic unit of unspecified rank, not part of the hierarchy of chrono­ stratigraphic units (see section 9.C.8).

Cline, a. A gradational of morphologic or physiologic differences exhibited by a group of related organisms, usually along a line of environmental or geographic transition.

b. The smallest unit in the hierarchy of diachronic units (North American Strati­ graphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Coincident-range zone. See concurrent-range zone.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 114 Glossary

Complex, a. A lithostratigraphic unit comprising diverse types of any age or any class or classes of rocks (sedimentary, igneous, metamorphic) and char­ acterized by irregularly mixed lithology or by highly complicated structural relations to the extent that the original sequence of the component rocks may be obscured and the individual rocks or rock sequence cannot be read­ ily mapped (see sections 5.C.8 and 5.F.4).

b. A lithodemic unit. An assemblage or mixture of rocks of two or more genetic classes, i.e., igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic, with or without highly complicated structure (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 861).

Component-stratotype. One of several specified intervals of strata making a composite-stratotype (see section 4.B.4).

Composite-stratotype. A stratotype formed by the combination of several speci­ fied type intervals of strata or type areas known as component-stratotypes (see section 4.B.4).

Concurrent-range zone. A body of strata including the concurrent, coincident, or overlapping parts of the range zones of two specified taxa selected from among the total forms contained in a sequence of strata (see section 7.D.2.b).

Condensation zone. A concentration of several biozones in a single bed (Heim, 1934).

Condensed section (condensed succession). A relatively thin but uninterrupted stratigraphic section of considerable time duration, in which the deposits accumulated very slowly.

Conformity, a. The mutual relationship between adjacent sedimentary strata that have been deposited in orderly sequence with little or no evidence of a time hiatus.

b. A surface that separates younger strata from older ones, along which there is no physical evidence of erosion or nondeposition and no significant hiatus (Mitchum, 1977, p. 206).

Consecutive-range zone. a. A body o f strata within the range o f a fossil group such that it forms the first part of the range of that fossil group before the appearance of its immediate evolutionary descendent (Report of the Stratigraphic Code Sub-Commit­ tee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 85).

b. A biozone characterized by one taxon of a lineage, in such a way that the precur­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 115

sor taxon ceases at the lower limit of the biozone and the successor taxon begins at the upper limit (A Guide to Stratigraphical Procedure, Holland et al., 1978, p. 13).

Correlation. To correlate, in a stratigraphic sense, is to show correspondence in character and in stratigraphic position between geographically separated stratigraphic sections or rock bodies. There are different kinds of correla­ tion depending on the feature or property to be emphasized (see section 3.A.9 and lithocorrelation, biocorrelation, and chronocorrelation).

Coset. A sedimentary unit made up of two or more sets, either of strata or of cross-strata, separated from other strata or cross-strata by original flat surfaces of erosion, non­ deposition, or abrupt change in character (McKee and Weir, 1953, p. 384).

Cross-stratum (cross-bed, crossbed). A single bed, more than 1 cm in thickness inclined at an angle to the main planes of stratification (McKee and Weir, 1953, p. 382).

D

Datum level or datum plane. The or top of a range of fossils that can be correlated in sections over a wide area (see section 7.C.4).

Degradation vacuity. The space-time value of the degradationally removed part of a transgressive-regressive depositional succession; the part of a lacuna resulting from the degradation of formerly existing rocks at an unconformity (Wheeler, 1964, p. 602).

Depositional holosome. See holosome.

Diachron. The fundamental and nonhierarchical diachronic unit (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 870-871).

Diachronic unit. A unit of geologic time that comprises the unequal spans of time repre­ sented either by a specific lithostratigraphic, allostratigraphic, biostratigraphic, or pedostratigraphic unit, or by an assemblage of such units (North American Strati­ graphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Diastem. a. A minor break or hiatus in a stratigraphic section, due largely to oscillations in the intensity of climatic factors (Barrell, 1917, p. 794).

b. A short interruption in deposition with little or no erosion of previously deposited material before resumption of (see section 6.B.2.c).

Disconformity. An unconformity in which the bedding planes above and below

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 116 Glossary

the stratigraphic break are essentially parallel; this apparent parallelism is restricted in areal extent (see section 6.B.2.b).

Division, a. A chronostratigraphic unit equivalent to stage, and possibly series, but hav­ ing a regional or more limited geographic range (Stdrmer, 1966, p. 25).

b. Any, as yet informal, stratigraphic unit of any kind (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 79).

Downlap. A base-discordant relation in which initially inclined strata terminate downdip against an initially horizontal or inclined surface (Mitchum, 1977, p. 206).

E

Ecostratigraphic unit. A stratigraphic unit based on the mode of origin or the environ­ ment of deposition of the rocks that compose it (Hedberg, 1958, p. 1893).

Ecostratigraphy. a. Stratigraphy based on the ecology of life forms (Schindewolf, 1950, p. 35).

b. The study and classification of stratified rocks according to their mode of origin or their environment of deposition (Hedberg, 1958, p. 1893).

Ecozone. a. An ecostratigraphic unit. A stratigraphic unit defined on the basis of its fos­ sil content and sedimentological characters as they indicate the environment of dep­ osition o f the unit.

b. A body of rock with upper and lower boundaries marked by reversible faunal changes that are essentially oblique to time planes (Vella, 1962, p. 183-199; 1964, p. 622-623).

Eon. The largest of the units of geologic time immediately above in the geochronologic hierarchy, during which the rocks of an were formed (see section 9.C.7).

Eonothem. The body of rocks formed during the time span of an eon. The largest unit of the chronostratigraphic hierarchy (see section 9.C.7).

Epibole. The deposits accumulated during a hemera (Trueman, 1923, p. 200). Equivalent to abundance zone.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 117

Episode. The unit of highest rank and greatest scope in the hierarchy of diachronic units (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 871).

Epoch. A unit of geologic time above an age and below a period in the geochronologic hierarchy, during which the rocks of the corresponding se­ ries were formed (see section 9.C.4).

Era. A unit of geologic time above a period and below an eon in the geochrono­ logic hierarchy, during which the rocks of the corresponding were formed (see section 9.C.6).

Erathem. The body of rocks formed during the time span of an era, next above in the hierarchy of chronostratigraphic units (see section 9.C.6).

Erosional vacuity. A term used by Wheeler (1958b, p. 1057), later replaced by “degra­ dation vacuity” (Wheeler, 1964, p. 602).

Ethnostratigraphy, ethnostratigraphic classification. The stratigraphic classi­ fication into units characterized by their content of archaeological artefacts; archaeological stratigraphy (Guide to archaeostratigraphic classification and terminology: definitions and principles, Gasche and Tunca, 1983, p. 332).

Event stratigraphy. The use of inferred geological events rather than the intrinsic pet­ rological characters of the rocks, or their contained fossils, for correlation (Ager, 1973, p. 63). Numerous subsequent authors have defined stratigraphy as the organization, classification, and correlation of the Earth’s rocks on the basis of short-term phenomena—explosive volcanism, rapid tectonic movements, abrupt changes of sea level, climatic cycles, storms, distinctive sedimentologic and bio­ logic events, and even extraterrestrial or other “rare events” at any scale.

Evolutionary zone. Equivalent to lineage zone (see section 7.D.4.C).

F

Facies. The aspect, appearance, nature, or manifestation of character of rock units, usually reflecting conditions of formation. Probably no geological term has been used more indiscriminately for a wider range of concepts than “facies.” As defined by Gressly (1838) the term “facies” was meant to express lateral changes in lithologic aspect. Its use has been broadened, however, to express environment of deposition or formation (deltaic facies, marine facies, volcanic facies, shallow-water facies), lithologic composition

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 118 Glossary

( facies, facies, -bed facies), geographic or climatic association (Tethyan facies, facies, tropical facies, Germanic facies), fossil content (graptolitic facies, shelly facies), tectonic association (oro- genic facies, geosynclinal facies), and metamorphic grade. “Facies” is also used as a noun for a rock body distinctive in aspect, appearance, or charac­ ter. When the term “facies” is used, it is desirable to make clear the specific kind of facies to which reference is made: lithofacies, biofacies, metamor­ phic facies, tectonofacies, etc. It should not be used for bodies of rock (lithostratigraphic units) of any rank (see section 3.A.13; Teichert, 1958b, and Weller, 1958).

Facies evolution. The gradual change of facies in time, indicating gradually changing sedimentation conditions (Teichert, 1958b, p. 2723).

Facies sequence. A succession of vertical facies (Teichert, 1958b, p. 2723).

Faciostratotype. A supplementary stratotype designated for local reference or refer­ ence to different facies, which distinguishes different ecologic conditions that ex­ isted during the time of the chronostratigraphic unit represented by the stratotype (Sigal, 1964).

Faunal break. An abrupt change or break from one fossil assemblage to another at a definite horizon in a stratigraphic sequence, usually produced by an un­ conformity or hiatus, or sometimes by a change in bottom ecology without interruption of deposition; a gap in the orderly evolution of a single organ­ ism through a vertical series of beds.

Faunichron. The geologic-time span corresponding to a faunizone of Buckman (1902) (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, p. 300).

Faunizone (faunal zone), a. Belts o f strata, each o f which is characterized by an assem­ blage of organic remains (Buckman, 1902, p. 557).

b. A biostratigraphic unit or body of strata characterized by a particular assemblage of fossil , regardless of whether it is inferred to have chronological or only environmental significance.

Faunizonite. Equivalent to faunizone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 69).

Faunule. An assemblage of fossil animals associated in one or a few contiguous strata and dominated by the representatives of one community (Fenton and Fenton, 1928, p. 20-22).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 119

Flood zone. Equivalent to abundance zone (see section 7.D.6.C).

Florizone (floral zone). A biostratigraphic unit or body of strata characterized by a par­ ticular assemblage of fossil floras, regardless of whether it is inferred to have chron­ ological or only environmental significance.

Florizonite. Equivalent to florizone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 69).

Florule. An assemblage of fossil plants associated in a single stratum or a few contiguous strata of limited thickness and dominated by the representatives of one community (Fenton and Fenton, 1928, p. 15).

Flow. A discrete, extrusive, volcanic body distinguished by , composi­ tion, order of superposition, or other objective criteria; the smallest formal lithostratigraphic unit of volcanic-flow rocks (North American Stratigraph­ ic Code, 1983, p. 858; see section 5.C.5).

Formal stratigraphic terminology. Terminology applied to stratigraphic units (formal stratigraphic units) that is properly defined according to an estab­ lished or conventionally agreed scheme of classification (see section 3.A.5.a).

Format. An informal lithostratigraphic unit composed of all the rocks between two se­ lected markers (for example, electric log makers) which can be extended laterally through lithologic changes affecting the enclosed strata (Forgotson, 1957, p. 2110).

Formation. A body of rocks of intermediate rank in the hierarchy of lithostrati­ graphic units; it is defined and identified by its lithologic composition and stratigraphic position. The formation is the fundamental unit in formal lithostratigraphic classification (see section 5.C.2). G

Genus-zone. The taxon-range zone of a genus (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 54).

Geochron. An interval of geologic time corresponding to a lithostratigraphic unit (H. S. Williams, 1901, p. 580, 583).

Geochrone. A standard unit of geologic time (H. S. Williams, 1893b, p. 294).

Geochronologic interval. The time interval between two geologic events (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 14).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 120 Glossary

Geochronologic unit. A unit of geologic time (see sections 2.D, 3.A.11, and 9. A).

Geochronology. The science of dating and determining the time sequence of events in the of the Earth (see section 3. A. 10).

Geochronometric unit. A unit of geologic time expressed quantitatively in thousands or millions of .

Geochronometry. The branch of geochronology that deals with the quantitative (numerical) measurement of geologic time in thousands or millions of years (see section 3.A. 12).

Geohydrologic unit. See hydrostratigraphic unit.

Geolith. A lithostratigraphic unit (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2362).

Geosol. a. A laterally traceable, mappable, geologic profile that has a con­ sistent stratigraphic position (Morrison, 1967, p. 3).

b. The fundamental and only unit in pedostratigraphic classification (North Amer­ ican Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 850, 865).

Global Boundary Stratotype Section and Point (GSSP). The selected type or standard for the definition and recognition of a stratigraphic boundary be­ tween two named standard global chronostratigraphic units, designated as a unique and specific point in a specific sequence of rock strata in a unique and specific location; identified in published form and marked in the sec­ tion (Cowie, 1986, p. 78; Cowie et al., 1986, p. 5).

Gradation zone. A body of rock with upper and lower boundaries defined by selected evolutionary stages of a gradational bioseries of planktonic or of any similarly well distributed bioseries (Vella, 1964, p. 621).

Group. The formal lithostratigraphic unit next in rank above a formation. The term is applied most commonly to a sequence of two or more contiguous or associated formations with significant and diagnostic lithologic features in common (see section 5.C.6).

Guide fossil. A fossil used to identify the age of the strata in which it is found, to indicate the conditions under which it lived, or as an index or guide in correlation of strata. Synonymous to index fossil.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 121

H

Hemera. The unit of geologic time corresponding to the acme of development of one or more species (Buckman, 1893, p. 481^182; 1902; 1903; Jukes-Browne, 1903).

Hiatal holosome. See holosome.

Hiatus, a. A break or interruption in the continuity of the , such as the absence in a stratigraphic sequence of rocks that would normally be but either were never deposited or were eroded before deposition of the overlying beds.

b. A lapse in time, such as the time interval not represented in the rocks at an unconformity.

c. A chronostratigraphic unit representing the space-time value of nondeposition during a regressive-transgressive episode (Wheeler, 1958b, p. 1057).

Holosome. An intertongued chronostratigraphic unit that may be either depositional (comprising one or more contiguous holosomes) or hiatal (consisting of combined contiguous hiatuses) (Wheeler, 1958b, p. 1061).

Holostratic unit. The local part of a stratic unit (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 67).

Holostratotype. The original stratotype designated by the original author at the time of proposing a stratigraphic unit or boundary (see section 4.B.7.a).

Holostrome. A chronostratigraphic unit embodying the space-time value of a complete (restored) transgressive-regressive depositional sequence, including strata that may later have been removed by erosion (Wheeler, 1958b, p. 1055-1056).

Holozone (holobiozone, holontozone). A biochronostratic unit representing the total range of a taxon (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 69).

Holozonite. A biostratic unit representing an entire range zone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Homotaxy (homotaxis). Similarity of serial arrangement; specifically taxo­ nomic similarity between stratigraphic or fossil sequences in separate re­ gions, or the condition of strata characterized by similar fossils occupying corresponding positions in different vertical sequences without connotation of similarity of age. The term was originally proposed as “homotaxis” by

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 122 Glossary

Huxley (1862, p. xlvi) to avoid the common fallacy of confusing taxonomic similarity with synchroneity.

Horizon. An interface indicative of a particular position in a stratigraphic se­ quence. In practice, the term has often been applied to a distinctive very thin bed. There may be many kinds of stratigraphic horizons depending on the stratigraphic characters involved: lithohorizons, biohorizons, chrono- horizons, seismic horizons, etc. (see section 3.A.8).

Hydrostratigraphic unit. A body of rock having considerable lateral extent and compos­ ing a geologic framework for a reasonably distinct hydrologic system (Maxey, 1964, p. 126).

Hypostratotype. A stratotype proposed after the original designation of the holostratotype (and parastratotype) in order to extend knowledge of the unit or boundary to other geographic areas (see section 4,B.7.e).

I

Independent units. Stratigraphic units that do not meet each other (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 66).

Index fossil. A fossil that identifies and dates the strata or succession of strata in which it is found, especially any fossil taxon that combines morphologic dis­ tinctiveness with relatively common occurrence or great abundance, a broad geographic distribution, and a narrow or restricted stratigraphic range that may be demonstrated to approach isochroneity. The best index fossils are generally the remains of planktonic organisms. Synonymous to guide fossil.

Industrial lithostratigraphic unit. A lithostratigraphic unit recognized primarily for utilitarian purposes, such as an aquifer, oil , layer, or ore-bearing bed. An informal unit even if named (see section 5.C. 10).

Infiltrated fossils. See introduced fossils.

Informal lithostratigraphic unit. A lithologic body to which casual reference is made but for which there is insufficient need, insufficient information, or inappropriate basis to justify designation as a formal unit (see section 5.C.10).

Instant, a. A stationary point in time-current (Kobayashi, 1944, p. 742).

b. The geochronologic equivalent of a chronohorizon if it has no resolvable time

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 123

duration on a geologic scale; a “time plane”; the beginning or the end of a moment (see section 9.B.4).

Interbiohorizon zone. Equivalent to interval zone (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 60).

Inter-level correlation. Correlation of two intervals that represent the same span of time (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 65).

Interthem. A minor unconformity-bounded unit comparable in thickness with a forma­ tion or in time span with a stage (Chang, 1975, p. 1544). Several interthems may be recognized within a synthem.

Interval (stratigraphic interval). The body of strata between two stratigraphic markers.

Interval zone. a. A biozone consisting of the body of fossiliferous strata between two specified biostratigraphic horizons (biohorizons) (see section 7.D.3).

b. A body of strata between two specified, documented lowest and/or highest oc­ currence of single taxa (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 862). Includes the range, interval, and lineage zones of the International Stratigraphic Guide.

Interzone. The unfossiliferous beds between fossiliferous ones (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 83).

Introduced fossils. Fossils originally in younger rocks later introduced in any one of several ways into the older rocks in which they are now found (see section 7.B.4).

Isobiolith. A para-time-rock unit defined by its contained fossils (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2362).

Isogeolith. A para-time-rock unit defined by its lithologic composition (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2362).

Isotopic age. An age expressed in years or millions of years calculated from the quantitative determination of the content of the parent and daughter nu­ clides during the decay of radioactive elements. The abbreviations Ka for thousand (103), Ma for million (106), and Ga for billion (milliard or thou­ sand million, 109) years are now generally used to express the length of time before the present (years ago), not the duration of a geological time interval.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 124 Glossary

K

Key bed. A well-defined, easily identifiable stratum or body of strata that has sufficiently distinctive characteristics, such as lithology or fossil content, to facilitate correlation in field mapping or subsurface work; equivalent to marker bed (see sections 5.C.4 and 9.B.4).

Key horizon. The top or bottom of an easily recognized, widespread lithostrati­ graphic unit that is so distinctive as to be of great value in stratigraphic work (see section 9.B.4).

L

Lacuna, a. A period during which sedimentation was either nil or, more likely, was re­ placed by erosion (Gignoux, 1950, p. 19; 1955, p. 15-16).

b. A chronostratigraphic unit representing the interpreted space-time value of both non-deposition (hiatus) and the erosionally removed part of the subjacent transgres- sive-regressive succession (Wheeler, 1958b, p. 1058).

Lamina. The thinnest recognizable unit layer of original deposition in a sediment or sedi­ mentary rock, generally less than 1 cm in thickness (Otto, 1938, p. 575; Campbell, 1967, p. 16-20).

Laminaset. A group or set of conformable laminae (Campbell, 1967, p. 16-17, 20).

Lapout. The lateral termination of strata at their depositional pinchout. Lapout may occur at the upper boundary of a sequence, where it is called toplap, or at the lower boundary, where it is called onlap or downlap (Mitchum, 1977, p. 208).

Law of superposition (Principle of superposition). The general law or princi­ ple, attributed to Steno (1669), upon which all geologic is based: in any sequence of layered rocks, sedimentary or extrusive volcanic, that has not been overturned, the youngest layer is at the top and the oldest is at the base.

Layer. A general term for any tabular body of rock—sedimentary, igneous, or metamorphic (see Calkins, 1941).

Lectostratotype. A stratotype for a previously described stratigraphic unit se­ lected later in the absence of an adequately designated original stratotype (holostratotype) (see section 4.B.7.C).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 125

Lens (lentil, lenticle). A lens-shaped body of rocks of different lithology than the unit that encloses it (see section 5.C.3).

Life-zone. A biochronostratic unit based on the range of a fossil form (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Lineage zone. A body of strata containing specimens representing a specific segment of an evolutionary lineage. It may represent the entire range of a taxon within a lineage or only that part of the range of a taxon below the appearance of a descendant taxon (see section 7.D.4.a).

Lithizone. A para-time-rock unit representing a zone or succession of strata possessing common lithologic characteristics (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2364).

Lithochronostratic unit. A chronostratic unit based on a lithostratic unit (Hennings­ moen, 1961, p. 66, 73).

Lithochronozone. A chronozone representing the rocks formed anywhere during the time span of a lithostratigraphic unit (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 869).

Lithocorrelation. See lithostratigraphic correlation.

Lithodeme. The fundamental unit in lithodemic classification; a body of intrusive, perva­ sively deformed, or highly metamorphosed rock, generally non-tabular and lacking primary depositional structures, and characterized by lithic homogeneity (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 860).

Lithodemic unit. A defined body of predominantly intrusive, highly deformed, and/or highly metamorphosed rock, distinguished and delimited on the basis of rock character­ istics. In contrast to lithostratigraphic units, a lithodemic unit generally does not con­ form to the (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 859).

Lithoecozone. A body of strata characterized by a certain paleoenvironment that is in­ ferred from the lithology and can be distinguished from the paleoenvironment of ad­ jacent strata (Poag and Valentine, 1976, p. 188).

Lithofacies. a. A lateral, mappable subdivision of a designated stratigraphic unit, distinguished from adjacent subdivisions on the basis of its lithologic composition.

b. The general aspect or appearance of the lithology of a rock body; the

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 126 Glossary

collective lithologic character of a rock body (see section 3.A.13 and Weller, 1958, p. 620-622, 633-634).

Lithogenetic unit. A local mappable assemblage of rock strata, such as a formation, member, or bed, considered without regard to time (Schenck and Muller, 1941).

Lithohorizon. An abbreviation of the term “lithostratigraphic horizon” (see sec­ tion 5.C.9).

Lithosome. A lithostratigraphic body (or unit) which is mutually intertongued with one or more bodies of differing lithic constitution (Wheeler and Mallory, in Fisher, Wheeler, and Mallory, 1954, p. 929; Wheeler and Mallory, 1956, p. 2719, 2722; see Weller, 1958, p. 624-625, 635-636).

Lithostratic unit. a. A protostratic unit based on lithologic data (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 72-74).

b. An abbreviation of the term “lithostratigraphic unit.”

Lithostratigraphic classification. The organization of rock bodies into units on the basis of their lithologic properties (see section 5.B.2).

Lithostratigraphic correlation (lithocorrelation). Similarity or correspond­ ence in lithologic properties and lithostratigraphic position between two stratigraphic sections (see sections 3.A.9 and 5.E).

Lithostratigraphic horizon. A surface of lithostratigraphic change, commonly the boundary of a lithostratigraphic unit, or a lithologically distinctive very thin marker bed within a lithostratigraphic unit (see section 5.C.9).

Lithostratigraphic unit. A body of rocks—sedimentary, igneous, or metamor­ phic—that is defined and recognized on the basis of its observable and dis­ tinctive lithologic properties or combination of lithologic properties and its stratigraphic relations (see chapter 5).

Lithostratigraphic zone (lithozone). A body of rocks that can be recognized by its lithologic properties and to which casual reference is made, but for which there is inappropriate basis to justify designation as a formal litho­ stratigraphic unit (see section 5.C.10).

Lithostratigraphy. The element of stratigraphy that deals with the description and systematic organization of the rocks of the Earth's crust into distinctive

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 127

named units based on the lithologic character of the rocks and their strati­ graphic relations (see section 5.B.1).

Lithostrome. A stratigraphic layer consisting of one or more beds of essentially uniform or uniformly heterogeneous lithologic character (Wheeler and Mallory, 1956, p. 2720-2722; see Weller, 1958, p. 625, 636).

Lithotope. a. A paleoecological term for the sedimentary record of a biotope; thus a biotope is preserved as a lithotope (Wells, 1944, p. 284).

b. The rock record of the environment, including both its physical and biologic ex­ pressions (Wells, 1947, p. 119).

c. An area of uniform sedimentation (Krumbein and Sloss, 1951, p. 194).

The term has subsequently been used for a stratigraphic unit, a part of a strati­ graphic section, a particular kind of sediment or rock, a body of uniform sediments formed by persistence of the , and, in an intangible sense, for a sedimentary rock environment and a physical environment (see Weller, 1958, p. 615-616, 636).

Lithozone. An abbreviation of the term “lithostratigraphic zone” (see section 5.C.10).

Local-range zone. a. The range zone of a taxon in a specific, geographically located section or area (American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1957, Re­ port 5, p. 1883). Equivalent to teilzone, topozone (see section 7.D.2.a.iv).

b. A body of strata in a specific geographical section or area characterized by the occurrence of a specified fossil group (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Com­ mittee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 85).

M

Magnafacies. A major, continuous, and homogeneous belt of deposits that is distin­ guished by similar lithologic and paleontologic characters and that extends oblique­ ly across time planes or through several defined chronostratigraphic units (Caster, 1934, p. 19).

Magnetopolarity unit. A body of rock unified by its remanent magnetic polar­ ity and distinguished from adjacent rock that has different polarity (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 861).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 128 Glossary

Magnetopolarity zone. A term used instead of “polarity zone” when there is risk of confusion with other kinds of polarity (North American Strati­ graphic Code, 1983, p. 862).

Magnetostratigraphic classification. The organization of rock bodies into units based on differences in magnetic character (see section 8.B.2).

Magnetostratigraphic polarity classification. The organization of rock bodies into units based on changes in the polarity of their remanent magnetization, related to reversals in the polarity of the Earth’s magnetic field (see section 8.B.4).

Magnetostratigraphic polarity unit. A body of rocks characterized by its mag­ netic polarity (see chapter 8).

Magnetostratigraphic polarity-reversal horizon (polarity-reversal horizon). A surface or very thin transition interval separating sequences of rock strata of opposite magnetic polarity (see section 8.B.6).

Magnetostratigraphic polarity-transition zone (polarity-transition zone). A substantial interval in a succession of rock strata (of the order of 1 m in thick­ ness) in which the magnetic polarity is reversed gradually (see section 8.B.6).

Magnetostratigraphic polarity zone (polarity zone). The basic formal unit of magnetostratigraphic polarity classification. Polarity zones may be subdi­ vided into polarity subzones and grouped into polarity superzones (see sec­ tion 8.C).

Magnetostratigraphic unit. A body of rocks unified by similar magnetic char­ acteristics (not only magnetic polarity) which allow it to be differentiated from adjacent rock bodies (see sections 8.A and 8.B.3).

Magnetostratigraphy. The element of stratigraphy that deals with the magnetic characteristics of rock units (see section 8.B.1).

Magnetozone. A magnetostratigraphic unit (see section 8.A).

Marine-flooding surface. A surface that separates younger from older strata, across which there is evidence of an abrupt increase in water depth (Van Wagoner et al., 1987, p. 11).

Marker, marker bed, . A readily recognized stratigraphic fea­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 129

ture (surface, bed) having stratigraphic characteristics distinctive enough for it to serve as a reference or datum or to be traceable over long distances; useful for stratigraphic correlation or for stratigraphic reference (see sec­ tions 5.C.4, 5.E.2, and 9.B.4).

Marker point. See Global Boundary Stratotype Section and Point.

Measures. A group or series of sedimentary rocks having some characteristic in com­ mon, specifically measures. The term apparently refers to the old practice of designating the different seams of a coalfield by their “measure” or thickness.

Megagroup. A lithostratigraphic unit next in rank above a group (Swann and Willman, 1961, p. 471, 475—476J. See supergroup.

Melange. A mappable body of rock characterized by the of fragments and blocks of all sizes, both exotic and native, embedded in a fragmented and generally sheared matrix of more tractable material (Berkland et al., 1972, p. 2296).

Member. The formal lithostratigraphic unit next in rank below a formation; it is always a part of a formation (see section 5.C.3).

Merostratic unit. Any stratic unit based on a partial range (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 67).

Merozone (merobiozone, merontozone). A biochronostratic unit representing the partial range of a taxon (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 69).

Merozonite. A biostratic unit representing a partial part of a range-zone; equivalent to partial-range zone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Mesothem. A time-significant stratigraphic unit forming major cycles of deposition which are normally bounded above and below by on shelf areas, but which have their limits defined by marker points at the bases of in con­ tinuously deposited sediments in basins (Ramsbottom, 1977, p. 282; 1978, p. 307). Equivalent to the sequence of Mitchum, Vail, and Thompson (1977).

Microbiofacies. The biologic aspect of microfacies stratigraphic analysis (Fairbridge, 1954, p. 683).

Microfacies. Those characteristic and distinctive aspects of a sedimentary rock that are vis­ ible and identifiable only under the microscope (low-power magnification) (Brown, 1943, p. 325; Cuvillier, 1951).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 130 Glossary

Microlithofacies. The lithologic aspects of microfacies stratigraphic analysis (Fairbridge, 1954, p. 683).

Miosynthem. A relatively small, minor synthem within a larger synthem but not a com­ ponent of a hierarchy of unconformity-bounded units (International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification, 1987a, p. 236).

Mixed topostratic unit. A topostratic unit with the lower boundary based on lithologic data and the upper boundary based on paleontologic data, or vice versa (Hennings- moen, 1961, p. 74).

Moment, a. The time interval during which a biostratigraphic zone was deposited (Renevier et al., 1882; Teichert, 1958a, p. 113-115, 117).

b. The geochronologic equivalent of a chronohorizon (see section 9.B.4).

Monothem. a. A non-cyclic, or not obviously cyclic, unit of genetically related strata, representing a more ordinary and perhaps more normal subdivision of a stage (Caster, 1934, p. 18).

b. A local deposit having essentially uniform lithologic character and correspond­ ing to formation or member of lithostratigraphic classification (R. C. Moore, 1949, p. 19; see Weller, 1958, p. 624, 636).

Morphogenetic zone. Equivalent to lineage zone (see section 7.D.4.C).

Morphostratigraphic unit. A body of rock that is identified primarily from the surface form it displays; it may or may not be lithologically distinctive from contiguous units. Typically applies to surficial deposits such as glacial moraines, alluvial fans, and ridges (Frye and Willman, 1960, p. 7).

Multifossil range zone. A biostratigraphic unit, a special type of range zone, marked by a concentration of the range zones of a number of different fossils (American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1957, Report 5, p. 1884).

N

Neostratotype. A new stratotype selected to replace an older one which has been destroyed, covered, or otherwise made inaccessible (see section 4,B.7.d).

Nonconformity. An unconformity developed between sedimentary rocks and older plu­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 131

tonic igneous or massive metamorphic rocks that have been exposed to erosion be­ fore the overlying sediments covered them (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, p. 119). o

Offlap. The progressive offshore regression of the updip terminations of sedi­ mentary units within a conformable sequence of rocks (Swain, 1949, p. 635; Mitchum, 1977, p. 208).

Onlap. The progressive pinch-out, toward the margins of a depositional basin, of the sedimentary units of a conformable sequence of rocks (Swain, 1949, p. 635; Mitchum, 1977, p. 208-209).

Ontozone. A biostratigraphic unit based on the range of a fossil form; equivalent to “bio­ zone” (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68-69).

Operational unit. An arbitrary stratigraphic unit that is distinguished by objective crite­ ria for some practical purpose; for example, a unit delimited by easily recognizable and traceable markers or a unit defined by the velocity of transmission of seismic or sonic energy (Sloss eta l., 1949, p. 109-110).

Oppel-zone. A biostratigraphic unit characterized by an association or aggregation of se­ lected taxa of restricted and largely concurrent range, chosen as indicative of ap­ proximate contemporaneity (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 57-58; see section 7.D.5.a, last paragraph).

Orthochronology. Geochronology based on a standard succession of biostratigraphically significant faunas or floras or on irreversible evolutionary processes (Schindewolf, 1950, p. 85; Teichert, 1958a, p. 106).

Orthostratigraphy. The standard or “main” stratigraphy based on fossils identifying rec­ ognized biostratigraphic units (Schindewolf, 1950, p. 85; 1957, p. 397).

Overlap. A general term referring to the extension of rock strata beyond underlying rocks whose edges are thereby concealed or “overlapped.” The term is often used in the sense of both onlap and overstep. Swain (1949, p. 634) urges abandonment of the term.

Overlap zone. Equivalent to concurrent-range zone (see section 7.D.2.b.iii).

Overstep. The regular truncation of older units of a complete sedimentary sequence by one or more later units of the sequence (Swain, 1949, p. 635).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 132 Glossary

P

Paleosol. A that formed on a landscape of the past; it may be a buried soil, a relict soil, or an exhumed soil (Ruhe, 1965, p. 755; Valentine and Dairy mple, 1976).

Paleo-thanatotope. The total of all sediments in which a fossil assemblage occurs (ex­ cluding reworked occurrences) (van Morkhoven, 1966, p. 312).

Parachronology. Geochronology based on fossils that supplement, or are used instead of, biostratigraphically significant fossils (Schindewolf, 1950, p. 84-85).

Paraconformity. An obscure or uncertain unconformity in which no erosion surface is discernible or in which the is a simple bedding plane, and in which the beds above and below the break are parallel (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, p. 119).

Paracontinuity. A small-scale disconformity traceable over a wide geographic area. It exhibits slight, but distinct, channeling and is associated with a slight, but signifi­ cant, faunal discontinuity (Conkin and Conkin, 1973).

Parasequence. A relatively conformable succession of genetically related beds or bedsets bounded by marine-flooding surfaces and their correlative sur­ faces (Van Wagoner, 1985, p. 91-92; Van Wagoner et al., 1987, p. 11).

Parasequence set. A succession of genetically related parasequences which form a distinctive stacking pattern that is bounded by major marine-flooding sur­ faces and their correlative surfaces (Van Wagoner et al., 1987, p. 11).

Parastratigraphic rock unit. A grouping of strata identified by objective lithologic cri­ teria but lacking in either mappability or, most commonly, in lithologic homogene­ ity and constancy (Krumbein and Sloss, 1963, p. 333).

Parastratigraphy. Supplemental stratigraphy based on fossils other than those governing the prevalent orthostratigraphy (Schindewolf, 1957, p. 397).

Parastratotype. A supplementary stratotype used in the original definition by the original author to illustrate the diversity or heterogeneity of the defined stratigraphic unit or some critical feature not evident or exposed in the holostratotype (see section 4.B.7.b).

Para-time-rock unit. A stratigraphic unit intrinsically diachronous; it expresses chronol­ ogy and should approach synchrony (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2364).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 133

Partial-range zone. A body of strata within the range of a taxon above the up­ permost documented occurrence of one taxon and below the lowermost documented occurrence of another taxon (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 85; see sec­ tion 7.D.3.a).

Parvafacies. A body of rock that comprises the part of any magnafacies lying between designated chronostratigraphic horizons or key beds traced across the magnafacies (Caster, 1934, p. 19).

Peak zone. Equivalent to abundance zone (see section 7.D.6.C).

Pedoderm. A mappable unit o f soil, entire or partially truncated, at the Earth's surface or partially or wholly buried, which has physical characteristics and strati­ graphic relationships that permit its consistent recognition and mapping.

Pedologic horizon. The product of soil development (), which oc­ curred subsequent to formation of the lithostratigraphic, allostratigraphic, or lithodemic unit or units on which the buried soil was formed (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 864).

Pedostratigraphic unit. A body of rock that consists of one or more pedologic horizons developed in one or more lithostratigraphic, allostratigraphic, or lithodemic units and is overlain by one or more formally defined lithostrati­ graphic or allostratigraphic units (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 864).

Period. The interval of geologic time (geochronologic unit) during which the rocks of the corresponding system (chronostratigraphic unit) were formed (see section 9.C.5.a and Table 3).

Phase. A term used with numerous, diverse, and often vague stratigraphic meanings; best avoided in stratigraphic nomenclature (see Weller, 1958, p. 619-620, 633).

Phylogenetic zone. Equivalent to lineage zone (see section 7.D.4.c).

Phylozone. a. A belt of rock formed during a biochron (Van Hinte, 1969, p. 271; see section 7.D.4.c).

b. Equivalent to lineage zone (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 58-59).

Polarity chron. The time span of a polarity chronozone (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 134 Glossary

Polarity-chronologic unit. A division of geologic time distinguished on the basis of the record of magnetopolarity as embodied in a polarity-chronostratigraphic unit (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Polarity-chronostratigraphic unit. A body of rock that contains the primary magnetic- polarity record imposed when the rock was deposited, or crystallized, during a spe­ cific interval of geologic time (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 869).

Polarity chronozone. The rocks of a specified primary polarity; the fundamental unit of worldwide polarity-chronostratigraphic classification (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Polarity excursion, a. A magnetostratigraphic polarity unit that may not be clearly clas­ sifiable as normal or reversed but may be designated as intermediate in direction.

b. A swing in the direction of the Earth's dipole magnetic field, with typical ampli­ tude of 15 degrees and period of 102 to 104 years (Harland et a l, 1982, p. 63; 1990, p. 140-141).

Polarity-reversal horizon. Either a single, clearly definable surface or a thin body of strata constituting a transitional interval across which a change in magnetic polarity is recorded (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 862).

Polarity-reversal transition-zone. A stratigraphic interval greater than 1 m thick across which a change in magnetic polarity is recorded (North Amer­ ican Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 862).

Polarity zone. A unit of rock characterized by the polarity of its magnetic signa­ ture; the fundamental unit of magnetopolarity classification (North Amer­ ican Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 862).

Prostratigraphy. A term used for “preliminary stratigraphy” including lithologic and pale- ontologic studies without consideration of the time factor (Schindewolf, 1954a, p. 25).

Protostratic unit. A stratigraphic unit whose boundaries delimit and embrace beds with a common physical property, such as a particular lithology or a particular fossil con­ tent (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 66).

R

Radiozone. A para-time-rock unit representing a zone or succession of strata established on common radioactivity criteria (Wheeler et al., 1950, p. 2364).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 135

Range-overlap zone. Equivalent to concurrent-range zone (see section 7.D.2.b.iii).

Range zone. The body of strata representing the known stratigraphic and geo­ graphic range of occurrences of any selected element or elements of the as­ semblage of fossils present in a stratigraphic sequence (see section 7.D.2).

Reef. A ridgelike or mountlike structure, layered or massive, built by sedentary calcareous marine organisms, especially corals, and consisting mainly of their remains.

Reference section. Equivalent to hypostratotype (see section 4.B.7.e).

Reworked fossils. Fossils from rocks of one age that have been eroded, trans­ ported, and redeposited in sediments of a younger age (see section 7.B.3).

Rock-stratigraphic unit. Equivalent to lithostratigraphic unit.

Rock-stratigraphy. Equivalent to lithostratrigraphy.

Rock unit. Equivalent to lithostratigraphic unit. s

Sechron. The maximum interval of geologic time occupied by a given depositional se­ quence, defined at the points where the boundaries of the sequence change laterally from unconformities to conformities along which there is no significant hiatus (Mitchum, 1977, p. 210).

Secule. The time span of a biostratigraphic zone (Jukes-Browne, 1903, p. 37).

Sequence (depositional sequence), a. The unit immediately above a system in the chronostratigraphic hierarchy, now called “erathem” (R. C. Moore, 1933, p. 54; Weller, 1960, p. 418, 449).

b. A lithostratigraphic unit larger than a group or supergroup, traceable over large areas of a continent, and bounded by unconformities of inter­ regional scope (Sloss et al., 1949, p. 110-111; Krumbein and Sloss, 1951, p. 380-381; 1963, p. 34-35; Sloss, 1963, p. 93-94).

c. A stratigraphic unit composed of a relatively conformable succession of genetically related strata and bounded at its top and base by unconformities

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 136 Glossary

or their correlative conformities (Mitchum, Vail, and Thompson, 1977, p. 53; Mitchum, 1977, p. 210).

Sequence stratigraphy, a. The study of rock relationships within a chrono­ stratigraphic framework of repetitive, genetically related strata bounded by surfaces of erosion or nondeposition or their correlative conformities (Van Wagoner etal., 1987, p. 11).

b. The study of genetically related facies within a framework of chrono- stratigraphically significant surfaces (Van Wagoner et al., 1990, p. 1).

Series. A unit of the conventional hierarchy of formal chronostratigraphic terms, ranking above a stage and below a system, always a subdivision of a system (see section 9.C.4 and Table 3).

Set. a. A group of essentially conformable strata or cross-strata, separated from other sedimentary units by surfaces of erosion, nondeposition, or abrupt change in charac­ ter (M cKee and Weir, 1953, p. 382-383).

b. A unit composed of two or more consecutive beds of the same lithology (Bokman, 1956, p. 126).

Soil-stratigraphic unit. Equivalent to pedostratigraphic unit.

Span. A unit of low rank in the hierarchy of diachronic units (North American Strati­ graphic Code, 1983, p. 870).

Species-zone. The taxon-range zone of a species (International Stratigraphic Guide, 1976, p. 54).

Stage. A unit of the conventional hierarchy of formal chronostratigraphic terms ranking next below a series; considered the basic working unit of chrono­ stratigraphic classification (see section 9.C.2 and Table 3).

Standard Global Chronostratigraphic (Geochronologic) Scale. The hierar­ chy of chronostratigraphic units (and their equivalent geochronologic units) of worldwide scope which will serve as a standard scale of reference for the dating of rocks everywhere and for relating all rocks everywhere to world geologic history (see section 9.D and Table 4). Equivalent to the General Stratigraphic Scale of the Stratigraphic Code of the USSR (1979, p. 115).

Standard zone. A biostratigraphic zone based on a type section in which specified beds

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 137

yield characteristic fauna. The base of the lowest bed yielding this fauna is defined as the base of the zone. The top of the zone is not explicitly defined (Callomon, 1965, p. 82).

Stratic unit. Equivalent to stratigraphic unit (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 63).

Stratigraphic classification. The systematic organization of the Earth's rock bodies, as they are found in their original relationships, into units based on any of the properties or attributes that rocks may possess (see section 3.A.3).

Stratigraphic leakage. The process whereby sediments and (or) fossils of a younger age are deposited within or under older rocks. The result or product of the process of stratigraphic leakage is stratigraphic leak (Foster, 1966, p. 2604).

Stratigraphic nomenclature. The system of proper names given to specific stratigraphic units (see section 3.A.6).

Stratigraphic terminology. The total of unit-terms used in stratigraphic classi­ fication, such as “formation,” “stage,” “biozone” (see section 3.A.5).

Stratigraphic unit. A body of rock recognized as a unit (distinct entity) in the classification of the Earth’s rocks, based on any of the many properties and attributes that rocks possess. Stratigraphic units based on one property will not necessarily coincide with those based on another (see section 3.A.4).

Stratigraphy. The science dealing with the description of all rock bodies form­ ing the Earth’s crust—sedimentary, igneous, and metamorphic—and their organization into distinctive, useful, mappable units based on their inherent properties or attributes. Stratigraphic procedures include the description, classification, naming, and correlation of these units for the purpose of es­ tablishing their relationship in space and their succession in time (see sec­ tion 3.A.1).

Stratomere. Any segment of a rock sequence (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub- Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 83).

Stratomeric standard terms. The terms of the formal chronostratigraphic hierarchy (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 83).

Stratotype (type section). The original or subsequently designated standard of reference of a named layered stratigraphic unit or of a stratigraphic bound­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 138 Glossary

ary; a specific interval or point in a specific sequence of rock strata that constitutes the standard of the definition and characterization of the strati­ graphic unit or boundary being defined (see chapter 4).

Stratum (plural = strata). A layer (generally tabular body) of rock character­ ized by certain lithologic properties or attributes that distinguish it from ad­ jacent layers from which it is separated by visible planes of bedding (see section 3.A.2).

Stratum correlation. Time-correlation of beds or sequences of beds (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 64).

Subage. The interval of geologic time during which the rocks of the correspond­ ing substage were formed (see section 9.C.3 and Table 3).

Subbiozone (subzone). A subdivision of any kind of biozone (see section 7.C.5).

Subgroup. A formally established subdivision of a group (see section 5.C.7).

Substage. A subdivision of a stage; the lowest unit of the conventional hierar­ chy of formal chronostratigraphic units (see section 9.C.3 and Table 3).

Subsystem. A formally established subdivision of a system (see section 9.C.5.a).

Subzone. A subdivision of any kind of stratigraphic zone.

Suite, a. (Formational suite or suite) A lithostratigraphic unit including several inti­ mately related members; a unit intermediate in scale between monothem and mem­ ber (Caster, 1934, p. 18).

b. An association of apparently comagmatic intrusive bodies of similar or related and close association in time, space, and origin.

c. A local stratigraphic unit used widely in the former Soviet Union and some eastern European countries corresponding approximately or precisely to a formation.

d. A lithodemic unit next higher in rank to lithodeme; comprises two or more lith- odemes of the same class (e.g., plutonic, metamorphic) (North American Strati­ graphic Code, 1983, p. 860).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 139

Superbiozone (superzone). A grouping of several biozones with common bio­ stratigraphic features (see section 7.C.6).

Supergroup. A lithostratigraphic unit composed of several associated groups or of associated formations and groups with significant lithologic features in common (see section 5.C.7).

Supersome. An assemblage of contiguous and depositionally sequential chronosomes (Schultz, 1982, p. 29-31).

Superstage. A grouping of several adjacent stages (see section 9.C.3).

Supersuite. A lithodemic unit next higher in rank to suite and comprising two or more suites or complexes having a degree of natural relationship to one another, either in the vertical or the lateral sense (North American Stratigraphic Code, 1983, p. 860).

Syn-biotope. The overlap area of the auto-biotopes of two or more systematic units (van Morkhoven, 1966, p. 306, 309).

Syn-thanatotope. The topographical area characterized by the co-presence of dead speci­ mens of two or more taxa, formed by the overlap of their auto-thanatotopes (van Morkhoven, 1966, p. 309).

Synthem. A body of rocks bounded above and below by specifically designated, significant and demonstrable discontinuities of regional or interregional magnitude in the stratigraphic succession; the basic unconformity-bounded unit (see sections 6.B.1 and 6.C and Chang, 1975, p. 1546).

System. A unit of the conventional, formal chronostratigraphic hierarchy rank­ ing above a series and below an erathem (see section 9.C.5 and Table 3).

System-group. A unit of the highest rank in the category of lithostratigraphic units (H. Wang, 1966).

Systems tract. A rock body that groups several intergradational and, in part, contemporaneous depositional systems; for example, fluvial, delta, shelf, and slope systems (Brown and Fisher, 1977, p. 215).

T

Taphonomy. The branch of paleoecology concerned with the manner of burial and the origin of plant and animal remains.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 140 Glossary

Taxon (plural = taxa). A named taxonomic group of organisms of any rank, such as particular species, genus, or family; also the name applied to that group.

Taxon-range zone. The body of strata representing the known range of occur­ rence (stratigraphic and geographic) of specimens of a certain taxon (species, genus, family, etc.) (see section 7.D.2.a).

Tectofacies. A group o f strata o f different tectonic aspect from laterally equivalent strata (Sloss eta l., 1949, p. 96; see Weller, 1958, p. 623, 635).

Tectono-stratigraphic (tectostratigraphic) unit. A mixture of lithostratigraphic units resulting from tectonic deformation.

Tectosome. A body of strata indicative of uniform tectonic conditions; the sedimentary rock record of a uniform tectonic environment (Weller, 1958, p. 625, 636).

Tectotope. A stratum or succession of strata with characteristics indicating accumulation in a common tectonic environment (Sloss et al., 1949, p. 96; see Weller, 1958, p. 616, 636).

Teilchron. The locally recognizable time span of a taxonomic entity (Arkell, 1933, p. 33).

Teilzone (teil-zone). a. The local duration of existence of a species (Pompeckj, 1914).

b. The range zone of a taxon in a specific section or area as contrasted with the total range. Equivalent to local-range zone and topozone (see section 7.D.2.a.iv).

Thanatocoenosis. A set of fossils brought together after death by sedimentary processes, rather than by virtue of having originally lived there collectively (see section 7.B.2).

Thanatotope. The total area in which the dead specimens of a taxon or taxa are deposited.

Time-level correlation. Correlation of time-levels (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 64).

Time-rock unit. Equivalent to chronostratigraphic unit.

Time-set unit. A stratigraphic unit arranged in time-continuous sets (“time-sets”) repre­ senting a continuous span of time (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 66).

Time-stratigraphic unit. Equivalent to chronostratigraphic unit.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Glossary 141

Time-stratigraphy. Equivalent to .

Tongue. A projecting part of a lithostratigraphic unit extending beyond its main body (Stephenson, 1917) (see section 5.C.3).

Toplap. The termination of strata against an overlying surface mainly as a result of non­ deposition (sedimentary bypassing) with perhaps only minor erosion (Mitchum, 1977, p. 211).

Topostratic unit. The local part o f a stratic unit, a “local unit” (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 67).

Topo-stratigraphic unit. A convenient regional stratigraphic unit consisting of a com­ bined rock unit and a biostratigraphic unit (Jaanusson, 1960, p. 218). Equivalent to the mixed topostratic unit of Henningsmoen (1961).

Topostratigraphy. Preliminary or introductory stratigraphy, including and .

Topozone. a. Equivalent to local-range zone and teilzone (R. C. Moore, 1957a, p. 1888) (see section 7.D.2.a.iv).

b. (topobiozone, topohontozone) A biochronostratic unit representing the local range of a taxon (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 69).

Topozonite. A biostratic unit representing the local development of a range zone; equiva­ lent to local-range zone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Total-range zone. The body of strata that comprises the complete horizontal and vertical range of occurrence of a specified fossil group (Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, 1967, p. 85).

Total vacuity. A missing interval or hiatus in a stratigraphic sequence caused by both erosion and nondeposition (Wheeler, 1958b, p. 1058).

Type area (or type region). The geographic area or region that encompasses the stratotype or type locality of a stratigraphic unit or stratigraphic bound­ ary (see section 4.B.6).

Type locality. The specific geographic locality in which the unit-stratotype of a layered stratigraphic unit or the boundary-stratotype of a boundary between layered units is situated; or lacking a designated stratotype, the locality where the unit or boundary were originally defined or named.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 142 Glossary

In the case of stratigraphic units composed of nonlayered igneous or bodies, the type locality is the specific geographic local­ ity where the unit was originally defined and named (see section 4.B.5).

Type section. Equivalent to stratotype (see section 4.B.1). u

Unconformity. A surface of erosion between rock bodies, representing a signifi­ cant hiatus or gap in the stratigraphic succession. Unconformities result from the subaerial or subaqueous exposure of rocks below the unconform­ ity and erosion with loss of part of the older rocks (see section 6.B.2).

Unconformity-bounded unit. A body of rocks bounded above and below by specifically designated, significant, and demonstrable discontinuities in the stratigraphic record, preferably of regional or interregional extent (see Chapter 6).

Unit-stratotype. The type section of a layered stratigraphic unit that serves as the standard of reference for the definition and characterization of the unit (see section 4.B.2).

Vacuity. See degradation vacuity and total vacuity. z

Zone. A stratigraphic unit in many categories of stratigraphic classification. There are many kinds of zones, depending on the stratigraphic properties under consideration—lithozones, biozones, chronozones, magnetic-polarity zones, and so on. The kind of zone being used should be clearly indicated (see section 3.A.7).

Zonite. Equivalent to range-zone (Henningsmoen, 1961, p. 68).

Zonule. The strata or stratum that contains a faunule, its thickness and area being limited by the vertical and horizontal range of that faunule (Fenton and Fenton, 1928, p. 20-22). Now generally used as a subdivision of a biozone or of a subbiozone (see section 7.C.7).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 National or Regional Stratigraphic Codes

1933 Classification and nomenclature of rock units, American Committee on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, G. H. Ashley et al.: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 44, p. 423^159; Am. Assoc. Geol. Bull., v. 17, no. 7, p. 843-868. Republished in Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 23, no. 7, p. 1068-1088, 1939.

1942 Rules of geological nomenclature of the of Canada: Geol. Survey Canada. (Reviewed in Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 366-367, 1948).

1948 Stratigraphic nomenclature in Australia, M. F. Glaessner et al.: Australian Jour. Sci., v. 11, no. 1, p. 7-9.

1950 Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature: Australian Jour. Sci., v. 12, no. 5, p. 170-173.

1952 Code of stratigraphic nomenclature of the Geological Society of Japan (in Japanese with stratigraphic unit-terms in English): Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 58, p. 112-113.

1954 Stratigraphic and geochronologic subdivisions—their principles, contents, terminology, and rules of use (in Russian), L. S. Librovich, ed., VSEGEI: Gosgeoltechizdat, Moscow, 85 p.

1956 Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature, 2nd ed.: Australian Jour. Sci., v. 18, no. 4, p. 117-121.

1956 Stratigraphic classification and terminology (in Russian), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. P. Rotay, ed.: Gosgeoltechizdat, Moscow. (English translation in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 1, no. 2, p. 22-38, 1959).

1959 Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature, 3rd ed.: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 6, pt. 1, p. 63-70.

1960 Project of stratigraphic code and its explanation (in Chinese), All-China Stratigraphic Commission: Sci. Press, Beijing, 33 p. Reprinted several in subsequent years.

143

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 144 National or Regional Stratigraphic Codes

1960 Czechoslovak stratigraphic terminology (in Czech): Vestnik Ustr. Ust. Geol., v. 35, p. 95-110.

1960 Stratigraphic classification and terminology, 2nd revised ed. (in Russian and English), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. P. Rotay, ed.: Gosgeoltechizdat, Moscow, 58 p.

1961 Code of stratigraphic nomenclature, American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 45, no. 5, p. 645-665.

1961 Codigo de nomenclatura estratigrafica (Spanish translation of Code of strati­ graphic nomenclature by American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1961), M. Alvarez, Jr., M exico, 28 p.

1961 Code of stratigraphic nomenclature for Norway (in Norwegian and English), Commission on Stratigraphy of Norway: Norges Geologiske Undersokelse, no. 213, p. 224-233.

1962 Principes de classification et de nomenclature stratigraphiques (Principles of stratigraphic classification and nomenclature), Comite Frangais de Stratigraphie, J. Sigal and H. Tintant, eds., 15 p. Unpublished but translated by F. de Rivero: Asoc. Venezolana Geol. Min. Petroleo Bol. Informativo, v. 8, no. 8, p. 224—237 (Spanish); p. 238-250 (English).

1962 Stratigraphic code of Pakistan, Stratigraphic Nomenclature Committee of Pak­ istan: Geol. Surv. Pakistan Mem., v. 4, pt. 1, p. 1-8.

1962 Codice di nomenclatura stratigrafica secondo i Nord-Americani (Italian trans­ lation of Code of stratigraphic nomenclature by American Commission of Strati­ graphic Nomenclature, 1961): Riv. Ital. Pal. Strat., v. 68, no. 1, p. 115-148.

1964 Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature, 4th ed., Committee on Strati­ graphic Nomenclature of Geological Society of Australia: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 11, pt. 1, p. 165-171: pt. 2, p. 342.

1965 Stratigraphic classification, terminology and nomenclature (in Russian), Inter­ departmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. I. Zhamoida, ed.: Izda- telstvo Nedra, Leningrad, 70 p., (English translation in Int. Geol. Rev. v. 8, no. 10, pt. 2, p. 1-36, 1966).

1965 Project of a stratigraphic code (in Chinese), People's Republic of China Strati­ graphic Conference, Beijing, 54 p.

1966 Lithostratigraphic units—nature, nomenclature and classification (in Bulga­ rian with English summary), Bulgarian Geological Society, T. Nikolov et al.: Bulgarian Geol. Soc. Rev., v. 27, pt. 3, p. 233-247.

1967 Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, T. N. George et al.: Geol. Soc. London Proc. 1638, p. 75-87.

1967 Guide to stratigraphic nomenclature, New Zealand Geol. Soc., 20 p.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 National or Regional Stratigraphic Codes 145

1968 Malaysian code of stratigraphical nomenclature, Geol. Soc. o f Malaysia, 11 p.

1968 Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London, revised, in International Geological Correlation Program, United King­ dom Contribution, British National Committee for Geology, Royal Society, 43 p.

1968 Turkish code of stratigraphic nomenclature (in Turkish), Turkish Stratigraphic Committee, 28 p.

1968 Preliminary stratigraphic code (of Yugoslavia), Z. Boskov-Stajner: Nafta, v. 19, no. 12 (Geologija i geofizika), p. 529-534. (English translation by D. Z. Briggs made for U.S. Geological Survey, 1970, 17 p.)

1969 Italian code of stratigraphic nomenclature (in Italian), Commissione Stratigrafica, Comitato Geologico d’ltalia (A. Azzaroli and M. B. Cita, with col­ laboration of R. Selli): Servizio Geologico d’ltalia Boll., v. 89 (1968), p. 3-22.

1969 Recommendations on stratigraphical usage, T. N. George et al.: Geol. Soc. London Proc. 1656, p. 139-166. (2nd revision of 1967 Report of the Strati­ graphical Code Sub-Committee, Geological Society of London).

1969 Key to the interpretation and nomenclature of stratigraphy, first and provisional edition, G. W. Liittig et al., INQUA Commission on Stratig­ raphy, Hannover, , 46 p.

1970 Code of stratigraphic nomenclature, 2nd ed., American Commission on Strati­ graphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., 22 p.

1970 Codigo de nomenclatura estratigrafica, segunda edicion, (Spanish translation of the second edition of the Code of stratigraphic nomenclature by the American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature), D. A. Cordoba and Z. de Cserna, M exico, 28 p.

1970 Scheme of a stratigraphic code for the USSR (in Russian), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. I. Zhamoida et al.: Leningrad, 55 p. (English translation by Program for Scientific Translations, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Interior and Nat. Sci. Foundation, 36 p.)

1971 South African code of stratigraphic terminology and nomenclature, South African Committee for Stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 74, pt. 3, p. 111-131.

1971 Code of stratigraphic nomenclature of India, Committee on Stratigraphic Nomenclature of India: India Geol. Survey Misc. Publ. 20, 28 p.

1972 A concise guide to stratigraphical procedure, Stratigraphy Committee of Geol. Soc. London, W. B. Harland, et al.: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 128, p. 295-305.

1972 Argentine code of stratigraphic nomenclature (in Spanish), Comite Argentino de Nomenclatura Estratigrafica: Asociacion Geologica Argentina, Serie “B”, no. 2, p. 1^10.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 146 National or Regional Stratigraphic Codes

1973 Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature, 4th edition reprinted with cor­ rigenda and additional notes: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 20, pt. 1, p. 105-112.

1973 Recommendations on the application of stratigraphic, especially lithostrati­ graphic, nomenclature in Switzerland (in German and French), Arbeitsgruppe fur Stratigraphische Terminologie, Schweizerische Geologische Komission: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 66, no. 2, p. 479^192.

1973 Stratigraphic code of Indonesia (in Indonesian), Komisi Sandi Stratigrafi Indo­ nesia, S. Martodjojo, ed., 19 p.

1975 Stratigraphic code of Indonesia, revised edition (in Indonesian and English), Commission for the Stratigraphic Code of Indonesia, S. Martodjojo, ed.: Assoc. Indonesian , 19 p.

1975 Polish guide to stratigraphic classification, terminology, and usage, 63 p.

1977 Stratigraphic code of the USSR—Provisional synopsis of rules and recom­ mendations (in Russian with English summary), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. I. Zhamoida et al., 79 p.

1977 Stratigraphic guide lines— Recommendations of the Stratigraphic Commission of the Deutsche Union der Geologischen Wissenschaften regarding the use of stratigraphic methods (in German, English, and French), Code-Commitee der Stratigraphischen Kommission der DUGW: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 6, no. 3, p. 131-151.

1977 South African code of stratigraphic terminology and nomenclature, revised edition (in English and Afrikaans), South African Committee for Stratigraphy: Dept, of Mines, Geological Survey Special Publication 20, 22 p.

1978 A Guide to stratigraphical procedure, Stratigraphy Committee of Geol. Soc. London, C. H. Holland et al.: Geological Society of London Special Report 11, 18 p.

1979 Saudi Arabian code of lithostratigraphic classification and nomenclature, Stratigraphic Committee of the Directorate General of Resources: Min­ istry of Petroleum and Mineral Resources of Saudi Arabia Technical Manual TM- 1979-1, 15 p.

1979 Stratigraphic code of the USSR—Provisional synopsis of rules and recom­ mendations (in Russian and English), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee o f the USSR, A. I. Zhamoida et al., 148 p.

1980 South African code of stratigraphic terminology and nomenclature, 3rd ed., revised (in English and Afrikaans), South African Committee for Stratigraphy, in Stratigraphy of South Africa, Pt. 1: Lithostratigraphy of the Republic of South Africa, South West Africa/Namibia and the Republics of Bophuthatswana, Transkey and Venda: Dept, of Mineral and Energy Affairs, Geological Survey, Handbook 8, p. 639-672.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 National or Regional Stratigraphic Codes 147

1981 Stratigraphic guide of China and its explanation (in Chinese), All-China Strati­ graphic Commission: Science Press, Beijing, 25 p.

1982 Stratigraphic code of Bulgaria—lithostratigraphic units (in Bulgarian), Na­ tional Commission on Stratigraphy of P. R. of Bulgaria: Bulgarian Geological Society Rev., v. 43, pt. 3, p. 286-310.

1983 Guide to archaeostratigraphic classification and terminology: definitions and principles, H. Gasche and O. Tunca: Jour. Field , v. 10, p. 325-335.

1983 North American stratigraphic code, North American Commission on Strati­ graphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 67, no. 5, p. 841-875.

1984 Codigo estratigrafico norteamericano 1983 (Spanish translation of North Amer­ ican stratigraphic code by North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomen­ clature, 1983), Mexico, 87 p.

1985 Field ’s guide to lithostratigraphic nomenclature in Australia, Strati­ graphic Nomenclature Committee of Australia, H. R. E. Staines, convener: Aus­ tralian Jour. Earth Sci., v. 32, p. 83-106.

1986 Stratigraphic guide of China (English translation of the Stratigraphic guide of China, 1981), Su Zongwei, in Tu Guangzhi (ed.), Advances in Science of China— Earth Sciences, v. 1, Sci. Press, Beijing and Wiley & Sons, New York, p. 159-214.

1986 Brazilian code of stratigraphic nomenclature—guide to stratigraphic nomen­ clature (in Portuguese), Comissao Especial de Nomenclatura Estratigrafica, Sociedade Brasileira de Geologia: Revista Brasileira de Geociencias, v. 16, no. 4, p. 370-415.

1988 Stratigraphic Code of the USSR, draft of second edition (in Russian), Inter­ departmental Stratigraphic Committee of the USSR, A. I. Zhamoida et al., Lenin­ grad, 56 p.

1989 Rules and recommendations for naming geological units in Norway, Norwegian Committee on Stratigraphy, J. P. Nystuen, ed.: Norwegian Journal of Geology, v. 69, supplement 2, 111 p.

1991 A guide to stratigraphical procedure, Stratigraphy Committee of Geol. Soc. London, A. Whittaker et al.: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 148, p. 813-824.

1992 Stratigraphic Code [of Russia], second edition, supplemented (in Russian with English summary and table of contents), Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Commit­ tee [of Russia], A. I. Zhamoida et al., St. Petersburg, 120 p.

1992 Argentine Stratigraphic Code (in Spanish), Comite Argentino de Estratigraffa: Asociacion Geologica Argentina, Serie “B”, no. 20, 64 p.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography of Stratigraphic Classification, Terminology and Procedure

As in the case of the first edition of the International Stratigraphic Guide, a comprehensive Bibliography of publications on stratigraphic classification, ter­ minology, and procedure is considered an essential part of this second edition of the Guide. It serves to show the background of ideas from which the Guide has grown, the evolution of thinking on stratigraphic classification and terminology, and the current status of views on these subjects in various parts of the world. The revision and updating of the Bibliography for this second edition of the International Stratigraphic Guide was a difficult task. Early in the process, it be­ came evident that the addition of publications on stratigraphic classification, ter­ minology, and procedure issued since the appearance of the Guide in 1976 would make the bibliography much too long. To keep it to a reasonable length and to a reasonably sharp focus, it was necessary to shorten it considerably. For this reason, the following Bibliography includes only those publications primar­ ily devoted to principles, concepts, and procedures of stratigraphic classification and nomenclature, but not those discussing the application of these principles, concepts, and procedures to specific areas, specific stratigraphic intervals, or particular local problems of stratigraphic classification or nomenclature, unless judged to be particularly instructive. While it would be ostensibly impossible, and unrealistic, to include in the Bibliography all publications dealing with the selection and establishment of stratigraphic boundaries and subdivisions of even just the principal units of the Standard Global Chronostratigraphic (Geochronologic) Scale, an exception was made with the publications dealing with the - boundary. The selection of the stratotype for this boundary was the first actual application in a specific case of the principles developed for the selection of boundary-strato­ types of internationally recognized chronostratigraphic units. The standards of procedure followed since then in the program of the International Commission on Stratigraphy to select stratotypes (GSSPs) for the boundaries of the major

149

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 150 Bibliography

units of the Standard Scale were developed and refined during the selection of the stratotype of the Silurian-Devonian boundary. Also included in the Bibliography are a number of publications dealing with the subdivision of the Precambrian, still a difficult and controversial sub­ ject, and publications that contain the original definition of terms listed in the Glossary of Stratigraphic Terms or to which reference is made in the Glossary. Finally, a few outstanding and classic historical contributions to the devel­ opment of concepts of stratigraphic classification, terminology, and procedure have been included in the Bibliography. Not included are publications dealing with organizational matters; records or of meetings of stratigraphic committees or groups that do not contain information on stratigraphic principles, concepts, or procedures; uninformative short notes and abstracts; and publications not readily available to the general public, such as university theses and locally reproduced distributed at meetings or mailed to a limited number of people. National or multinational codes and guides have been listed separately in the chronologic order of their publication. The editor wishes to express his indebtedness to all ISSC members and oth­ ers who assisted in the revision and updating of the Bibliography, particularly to Alexander Zhamoida and Zhang Shou-xin, who provided invaluable help in the selection and the proper referencing, and transliterating of publications in Rus­ sian and Chinese, respectively.

Adams, J. A. S., and J. J. W. Rogers, 1961, Bentonites as absolute time-stratigraphic cali­ bration points: in Geochronology of rock systems, N. Y. Acad. Sci. Ann., v. 91, Art. 2, p. 390-396. Ager, D. V., 1970, The system in Britain and its stratigraphical nomenclature: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 126, nos. 501/2, parts 1 and 2, p. 3-17. Ager, D. V., 1973, The nature of the stratigraphical record: Wiley, New York, 114 p. Ager, D. V., 1981, The nature of the stratigraphical record, 2nd ed., MacMillan, London, 122 p. Ager, D. V., 1984, The stratigraphic code and what it implies: in Catastrophes and Earth history (W. A. Berggren and J. A. Van Couvering, eds.): Princeton University Press, p. 91-100. Alberti, F. von, 1834, Beitrag zu einer Monographie des Sandsteins, Mus- chelkalks und und die Verbindung dieser Gebilde zu einer Formation: Stuttgart und Tubingen, 366 p. (see p. 1-16 and 300-343.) Albritton, C. C., Jr., 1984, Geologic time: Jour. Geol. Education, v. 32, no. 1, p. 29-37. Alcock, F. J., 1934, Report of the National Committee on Stratigraphic Nomenclature: Royal Soc. Canada, Trans., ser. 3, v. 28, sec. 4, p. 113-121. Alimov, A. I., 1970, Definition of the concept “regional stratigraphic subdivision” (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 12, p. 108-113. Alimov, A. I., 1973, Objectives of stratigraphy (in Russian): Geol. i Geof., no. 1, p. 74-79.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 151

Allan, R. S., 1934, On the system and stage names applied to subdivisions of the strata in New Zealand: New Zealand Inst. (Royal Soc. of New Zealand) Trans, and Proc., v. 63, p. 81-108. Allan, R. S., 1948, Geological correlation and paleoecology: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 1, p. 1-10. Allan, R. S., 1956, Report of the Standing Committee on datum-planes in the geological history of the Pacific region: 8th Pacific Sci. Cong. (1953), Proc., v. 2, p. 325^123: Nat. Res. Council of the Philippines. Allan, R. S., 1966, The unity of stratigraphy: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 9, no. 4, p. 491^-94. Allen, P. M., and A. J. Reedman, 1968, Stratigraphic classification in Pre- rocks: Geol. Mag., v. 105, no. 3, p. 290-297. Alpern, B., 1970a, Le concept de biozone en palynologie houilliere: Palaont. Abh., Abt. B, Bd. 3, H. 3/4, p. 277-278. Alpern, B., 1970b, Notes sur les concepts d'espece et de biozone: in Colloque sur la stratigraphie du Carbonifere: Liege Univ. Cong. Colloq., v. 55, p. 81-89. Alpern, B., and S. Durand, 1972, Les methodes de la palynologie stratigraphique: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, p. 201—216. Alvarez, M., Jr., 1957, Comments on Report 5 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Nature, usage and nomenclature of biostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1888-1889. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1947, Note 2— Nature and classes of stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 31, no. 3, p. 519-528. (Discussion in Note 6: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 376-381.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1948, Note 3— Rules of geological nomenclature of the Geological Survey of Canada: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 366-367. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by W. V. Jones and R. C. Moore), 1948, Note 4— Naming of subsurface stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 367-371. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. F. and R. C. Moore), 1948, Note 5—Definition and adoption of the terms stage and age: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 372-376. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1948, Note 6— Discussion by J. Rodgers, W. W. Rubey, and M. N. Bramlette of Note 2— Nature and classes of stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 32, no. 3, p. 376-381. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1949, Note 8— Australian code of stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 33, no. 7, p. 1273-1276. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1949, Note 9—The - boundary: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 33, no. 7, p. 1276-1280. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1949, Report 1— Declaration on naming of subsurface stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 33, no. 7, p. 1280-1282. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore), 1950,

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 152 Bibliography

Note 10— Should additional categories of stratigraphic units be recognized?: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 34, no. 12, p. 2360-2361. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by H. D. Hedberg), 1952, Report 2— Nature, usage and nomenclature of time-stratigraphic and geologic­ time units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 36, no. 8, p. 1627-1638. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1952, Note 14— Official report of round table conference on stratigraphic nomenclature at Third Congress of Car­ boniferous Stratigraphy and Geology, Heerlen, Netherlands, June 26-28, 1951: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 36, no. 10, p. 2044-2048. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by J. M. Harrison), 1955, Report 3— Nature,usage, and nomenclature of time-stratigraphic and geologic­ time units as applied to the Precambrian: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 39, no. 9, p. 1859-1861. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by G. V. Cohee, R. K. DeFord, J. M. Harrison, G. E. Murray, and C. H. Stockwell), 1956, Report 4— Nature, usage, and nomenclature of rock-stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 8, p. 2003-2014. (Discussion by F. A. Kottlowski: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 4, p. 893-894, 1958.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. C. Moore and G. V. Cohee), 1956, Note 17— Suppression of homonymous and obsolete strati­ graphic names: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 12, p. 2953-2954. (Discussion by A. F. Agnew and M. Kay: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1889-1891, 1957.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by G. M. Richmond and J. C. Frye), 1957, Note 19— Status of in stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geologists Bull., v. 41, no. 4, p. 758-763. (Discussion by W. M. Merrill: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 8, p. 1978-1979, 1958.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by H. D. Hedberg, M. Gordon, Jr., E. T. Tozer, H. E. W ood II, and K. Fohman), 1957, Report 5— Nature, usage and nomenclature of biostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1877-1889. (Discussion by C. Teichert: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 11, p. 2574-2575.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by G. M. Richmond), 1959, Report 6— Application of stratigraphic classification and nomenclature to the Quaternary, by Comm, on Pleistocene, G. R. Richmond, Chair., and Comments by J. H. Bretz et al.: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 43, no. 3, p. 663-673. (Discussion by A. C. Trowbridge et al., p. 674-675.) American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (Prepared by G. M. Richmond and J. G. Fyles), 1964, Note 30— Application to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature for an amendment of Article 31, remark (b) of the Code of Strati­ graphic Nomenclature on misuse of the term “stage”: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 48, no. 5, p. 710-711. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1964, Correction to Note 30: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 48, no. 7, p. 1196. American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1965, Note 32— “Definition of Geologic Systems” by International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Terminology: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 49, no. 10, p. 1694-1703. (Further references to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature under “North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature”.)

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 153

Andrews, J., and K. J. Hsu, 1970, Note 38 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— A recom­ mendation to the American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature concerning nomenclatural problems of submarine formations: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 54, no. 9, p. 1746-1747. Anthony, J. W., 1955, Geological stratigraphy: Geochronology, Arizona Univ. Physical Sci. Bull., no. 2, p. 82-86. Arduino, G., 1759 or 1760, Letters of Giovanni Arduino to Antonio Vallisnieri, dated Jan. 30, 1759 and March 30, 1759, published in Nuovo raccolta di opuscoli scien- tifici e filologici del padre abate Angiolo Calogiera, v. 6, p. 99-180. Arkell, W. J., 1933, The System in Great Britain: Clarendon Press, Oxford, 681 p. (see p. 1-37.) Arkell, W. J., 1946, Standard of the European Jurassic: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 57, p. 1-34. Arkell, W. J., 1951, Review of “Grundlagen und Methoden der Palaontologischen Chronologie” (3rd ed.) by O. H. Schindewolf: Geol. Mag., v. 88, p. 303-304. Arkell, W. J., 1956a, Comments on stratigraphic procedure and terminology: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 254, no. 8, p. 457^167. Arkell, W. J., 1956b, Jurassic geology of the world: Oliver and Boyd, London, 806 p. (see Chapter 1, Classification and correlation, p. 3-14.) Arkell, W. J., 1958, Further comments on stratal terms: Discussion (of O. H. Schinde- wolf’s comments on stratigraphic terms 1957: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 255, no. 6, p. 394—399): Am. Jour. Sci., v. 256, no. 5, p. 365. Arnold, H., 1966, Grundsatzliche Schwierigkeiten bei der biostratigraphischen Deutung phyletischer Reihen: Senckenbergiana Lethaea, v. 47, nos. 5-6, p. 537-547. Ashley, G. H., 1932a, Stratigraphic nomenclature: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 43, no. 2, p. 469^176. Ashley, G. H., 1932b, Geologic time and the rock records: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 43, no. 2, p. 477^486. Ashley, G. H., 1938, The Canadian System: Topographic and Geologic Survey Progress Report 119: Pennsylvania Geol. Survey, 7 p. Azzaroli, A., and M. B. Cita, 1963(7), Geologia stratigrafica: v. 1, La Goliardico, Milano, 262 p. (see p. 1-120). Barrell, J., 1917, Rhythms and the measurement of geologic time: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 28, p. 745-904. Barthel, K. W., 1971, Stratigraphic problems: Reference sections, the , and the Jurassic/ boundary: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., heft 1, p. 513-516. Bassett, M. G., 1985, Toward a “common language” in stratigraphy: Episodes, v. 8, no. 2, p. 87-92. Bell, W. C., 1950, Stratigraphy: a factor in paleontologic taxonomy: Jour. , v. 24, p. 492-496. Bell, W. C., 1959, — or uniformity: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 43, no. 12, p. 2862-2865. Bell, W. C., 1960, Review of “Stratigraphic principles and practice” by J. Marvin Weller: Jour. Geol., v. 68, no. 6, p. 684-686. Bell, W. C., G. E. Murray, and L. L. Sloss, 1959, Symposium on concepts of stratigraphic classification and correlation: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 673-778. Bell, W. C., et al., 1961, Note 25 (of Am. Comm. Stratigr. Nomen.)— Geochronologic and chronostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 45, no. 5, p. 666-670.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 154 Bibliography

Benda, L., G. Liittig, and H. Schneekloth, 1966, Aktuelle Fragen der Biostratigraphie im nordeuropaischen Pleistozan: Eiszeitalter und Gegenwart, v. 17,p. 218-223. Berger, W. H., and E. Vincent, 1981, Chemostratigraphy and biostratigraphic correlation: exercises in systemic stratigraphy: 26th Int. Geol. Congress (Paris, 1980), Colloque C4 (Geology of Oceans), Oceanologica Acta, Suppl. to v. 4, p. 115-127. Berggren, W. A., 1971a, Multiple phylogenetic zonations of the based on planktonic foraminifera; in 2nd Planktonic Conf. (Rome, 1970) Proc., (A. Farinacci, ed.), v. 1, p. 41-56. Berggren, W. A., 1971b, Tertiary boundaries and correlations: in The of Oceans (B. M. Funnell and W. R. Riedel, eds.): Cambridge Univ. Press, p. 693-809. (see in particular p. 693-702.) Berggren, W. A., 1971c, chronostratigraphy, planktonic foraminiferal zonation and the radiometric time scale: Foldtani Kozlony, Flungarian Geol. Soc. Bull. 101, p. 162-169. (Colloquium on the Neogene, Budapest, 1969.) Berggren, W. A., 1972, A Cenozoic time-scale— some implications for and paleobiogeography: Lethaia, v. 5, no. 2, p. 195-215. Berggren, W. A., 1973, The Pliocene time scale: calibration of planktonic foraminiferal and calcareous nannoplankton zones: Nature, v. 243, no. 5407, p. 391-397. Berggren, W. A., 1978, , in Contributions to the (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner and H. D. Hedberg, eds.): Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 39-55. Berggren, W. A., et al., 1967, Late Pliocene-Pleistocene stratigraphy in deep sea cores from the south-central North : Nature, v. 216, p. 253-254. Berggren, W. A., B. U. Haq, and J. A. Van Couvering, 1978, On boundary stratotypes, reply: Marine Micropaleontology, v. 3, no. 2, p. 198-200. Berggren, W. A., et al., 1979, Fossilization (taphonomy), biogeography and biostratig­ raphy, in Treatise of Invertebrate Paleontology (R. A. Robison and C. Teichert, eds.), Part A—Introduction: Geol. Soc. America and Univ. of Kansas, , CO, and Lawrence, KS, 569 p. Berkland, J. O., et al., 1972, What is Franciscan?: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 56, no. 12, p. 2295-2302. Berry, W. B. N., 1966, Zones and zones— with exemplifications from the : Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 50, no. 7, p. 1487-1500. Berry, W. B. N., 1968, Growth of a prehistoric time scale: W. H. Freeman, San Fran­ cisco, 158 p. Berry, W. B. N., 1974, Erben’s “Inventory in Stratigraphy”— a model from the California Tertiary foraminifer succession: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 3, no. 2, p. 65-72. Berry, W. B. N., 1983, On the relationship between ecostratigraphy and zonal stratig­ raphy: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 12, no. 2, p. 84-97. Berry, W. B. N., 1984, The Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary— the ideal geologic time scale boundary?: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 13, no. 3, p. 143-155. Beznosov, N. V., 1975, Some problems of stratigraphic classification associated with the development of regional stratigraphic schemes (in Russian): Trudy, VNIGNI, vyp. 171, p. 3-26. Biquand, D., 1972, Application du paleomagnetisme a la resolution de problemes strati- graphiques: difficultes et limites actuelles de la methode: in Colloque sur les meth­ odes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970): BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 861-876. Blackwelder, E., 1924, Suggestions for the improvement of our geologic terminology

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 155

(abstr.): Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 35, no. 1, p. 103; Pan-American Geol., v. 41, no. 2, p. 151. Blanford, W. T., 1884, On the classification o f sedimentary strata: Geol. Mag., 3rd ser., v. l,p. 318-321. Blanford, W. T., 1889, The anniversary address of the president: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 45, Proc., p. 37-77. Blank, R. G., 1979, Applications of probabilistic biostratigraphy to chronostratigraphy: Jour. Geol., v. 87, no. 6, p. 647-670. Blank, R. G., and C. H. Ellis, 1982, The probable range concept applied to the biostratig­ raphy o f marine : Jour. Geol., v. 90, no. 4, p. 415^133. Blatt, H., W. B. N. Berry, and S. Brande, 1991, Principles of stratigraphic analysis: Blackwell, Boston, 512 p. Bliss, N. W., 1968, The need for a revised stratigraphic nomenclature in the Precambrian of Rhodesia: Annexure to v. 71, Symposium on the Rhodesian Basement Complex: Geol. Soc. South Africa, Rhodesian Branch, p. 205-213. Blow, W. H., 1970, Validity of biostratigraphic correlations based on the Globigerinacea: Micropaleontology, v. 16, no. 3, p. 257-268. Bodylevsky, V. I., 1964, On the stratigraphic zone (in Russian): Trudy, VSEGEI, v. 102, p. 25-32. Boggs, S., Jr., 1987, Principles of sedimentation and stratigraphy: Merrill, Columbus, Ohio, 784 p. Bogsch, L., 1962, Einige prinzipielle und praktische Fragen der erdgeschichtlichen Grenzen auf Grund Egerer Fauna: Annal. Univ. Sci. Budapest, Sect. Geol., v. 5 (1961), p. 11-23. Bokman, J., 1956, Terminology for stratification in sedimentary rocks: Geol. Soc. Amer­ ica Bull., v. 67, no. 1, p. 125-126. Borovikov, L.I., and T. N. Spizharsky, 1965, Principles of subdivision and correlation of Pre-Cambrian deposits (in Russian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 1, p. 21-29. Borrello, A. V., and A. J. Cuerda, 1963, Sobre el codigo de nomenclatura estratigrafica y su signification: Com. Invest. Cient. An. (Provincia Buenos Aires), v. 4, p. 515-521. Boucot, A. J., 1970, Practical taxonomy, zoogeography, paleoecology, paleogeography and stratigraphy for Silurian and Devonian brachiopods: in North American Paleont. Conv., (Chicago, 1969), Proc., pt. F, (Correlation by fossils), p. 566-611. Boucot, A. J., 1984, Ecostratigraphy; in Stratigraphy quo vadis? (E. Seibold and J. D. Meulenkamp, eds.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 16, p. 55-60. Bourbeau, G. A., 1958, Soils in stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 8, p. 1987-1992. Boussac, J., 1910, Du role de l'hypothese en paleontologie stratigraphique: Revue Scien- tifique, Paris, 48th ann., p. 5-9. Brakel, A. T., 1989, Proposals of the re-use of invalid and superseded stratigraphic names in Australia: Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geol. and Geophys., Record 1989/51, 9 p. Bramlette, M. N., 1965, Massive extinctions in biota at the end of time: Sci­ ence, v. 148, p. 1696-1699. Bramlette, M. N., and W. R. Riedel, 1971, Observations on the biostratigraphy of pelagic sediments: in The micropaleontology of oceans (B. M. Funnel and W. R. Riedel, eds.): Cambridge Univ. Press, p. 665-668. Branson, C. C., 1956, Cyclic formations or mappable units: Oklahoma Geology Notes, v. 16, p. 122-126.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 156 Bibliography

Branson, C. C., 1961, Code of stratigraphic nomenclature: Oklahoma Geology Notes, v. 21, no. 12, p. 317-322. Breddin, H., 1938, Bemerkungen zur Frage der Richtprofile: Deutsche Geol. Gesell Zeit- schr., v. 90, p. 231-232. Brenner, R. L., and T. R. McHargue, 1988, Integrative Stratigraphy: concepts and appli­ cations: Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 419 p. Brewer, R., 1972, Use of macro- and micromorphological data in soil stratigraphy to elu­ cidate surficial geology and soil genesis: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 19, pt. 3, p. 331-344. Brewer, R., K. A. W. Crook, and J. G. Speight (Sub-committee for soil-stratigraphic nomenclature), 1970, Proposal for soil-stratigraphic units in the Australian Strati­ graphic Code: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 17, pt. 1, p. 103-111. Broeck, E. van den, 1883, Note sur un nouveau mode de classification et de notation graphique des depots geologiques: Musee Royal d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique Bull., v. 2, p. 341-369. Broecker, W. S., and J. I. Kulp, 1956, The radiocarbon method of age determination: Am. Antiquity, v. 22, no. 1, p. 1-11. Brongniart, A., 1829, Tableau des terrains qui composent l’ecorce du globe, ou Essai sur la structure de la partie connue de la terre: Paris, 433 p. Bronnimann, P., and J. Resig, 1971, A Neogene Globigerinacean biochronologic time- scale of the southwestern Pacific: Initial reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 7, pt. 2, p. 1235-1469. Brooks, J. E., and D. L. Clark, 1961, Thermoluminescence as a correlation tool in the Austin Chalk in north-central : Graduate Research Center, Southern Methodist Univ. Jour., v. 29, no. 3, p. 198-204. Brouwer, A., 1978, Rocks, life and time— an international guide through the stratigraphic labyrinth: Geologie en Mijnbouw, v. 57, no. 3, p. 395^100. Brown, J. S., 1943, Suggested use of the word microfacies: , v. 38, no. 4, p. 325. Brown, L. F., Jr., and W. L. Fisher, 1977, Seismic-stratigraphic interpretation of deposi­ tional systems: examples from Brazilian rift and pull-apart basins, in Seismic stratig­ raphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p.213-248. Brunn, J. H., 1972, Reflexions sur les objectifs de la stratigraphie et les moyens qu'elle met en oeuvre: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 1001-1005. Bubnoff, S. von, 1963, Fundamentals of geology (English translation of Grundprobleme der Geologie, 1954): Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh, 287 p. Buch, L. von, 1810, Etwas iiber locale und allgemeine Gebirgsformationen: Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin, Jahrg. 4, p. 69-74. Buckman, S. S., 1893, The of the Sherborne district: its relation to subjacent and superjacent strata: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 49, p. 479-522. Buckman, S. S., 1898, On the grouping of some divisions of so-called Jurassic time: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 54, p. 442^462. Buckman, S. S., 1902, The term “Hemera”: Geol. Mag., new ser., v. 9, p. 554-557. Buckman, S. S., 1903, The term “Hemera”: Geol. Mag., new ser., v. 10, p. 95-96. Bukry, D., 1971, stratigraphy, Leg 7, Deep Sea Drilling Project: Initial reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 7, pt. 2, p. 1513-1528. Bukry, D., 1973, Coccolith stratigraphy, eastern equatorial Pacific, Leg 16, Deep Sea

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 157

Drilling Project: Initial reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 16, p. 653-711. Burollet, P. F., 1956, Contribution a l’etude stratigraphique de la Tunisie Centrale: Annales des Mines et de la Geologie, no. 18, 345 p. Burollet, P. F., 1959, Remarques sur la nomenclature stratigraphique: Sciences de la Terre, v. 5 (1957), nos. 2-3, p. 117-136. Busson, G., 1972, Nomenclature et classification stratigraphiques: confrontation des problemes actuels aux donnees de I’etude du Mesozoi'que saharien: in Principes, methodes et resultats d'une etude stratigraphique du Mesozoi'que saharien: Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. (Paris) Mem., ser. C, v. 26, p. 51-85. Cahen, L., 1958, Quelques considerations sur les relations entre Precambrien et Cambrien et le probleme des series intermediaires: Colloques Int. du Centre Nat. Rech. Sci., Paris, 1957, p. 133-138. Calkins, F. C., 1941, “Band,” “layer,” and some kindred terms: Econ. Geol., v. 36, no. 3, p. 345-349. Callomon, J. H., 1965, Notes on Jurassic stratigraphical nomenclature I. Principles of stratigraphic nomenclature: Carpatho-Balkan Geological Assoc., VII Cong. (Sofia, 1965), Reports, part II, v. 1, p. 81-89. Callomon, J. H., 1984, Biostratigraphy, chronostratigraphy and all that— again!: in In­ ternational Symposium on Jurassic Stratigraphy (Erlangen, 1984) (O. Michelsen and A. Zeiss, eds.), v. 3, p. 612-624: Geological Survey of . Callomon, J. H., and D. T. Donovan, 1966, Stratigraphic classification and terminology: Geol. Mag., v. 103, no. 1, p. 97-99. Callomon, J. H., and D. T. Donovan, 1971, A code of Mesozoic stratigraphical nomen­ clature: BRGM France, Mem. 75, Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), p. 75-81. Campbell, C. V., 1967, Lamina, laminaset, bed, and bedset: Sedimentology, v. 8, no. 1, p. 7-26. Cande, S. C., and D. V. , 1992, A new geomagnetic polarity time scale for the and Cenozoic: Jour. Geophys. Research, v. 97, no. BIO, p. 13917-13951. Carozzi, A. V., 1951, La notion de synchronisme en geologie: Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appl., v. 58, nos. 7-8, p. 230-236. Carter, R. M., 1970, A proposal for the subdivision of Tertiary time in New Zealand: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 13, no. 2, p. 350-363. Carter, R. M., 1974, A New Zealand case-study of the need for local time-scales: Lethaia, v. 7, no. 3, p. 181-202. Caster, K. E., 1934, The stratigraphy and paleontology of northwestern Pennsylvania, Part I— Stratigraphy: Bull. Am. Paleontology, v. 21, 185 p. Chadwick, G. H., 1930, Subdivision of geologic time: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 41, p. 47—48. Challinor, J., 1978, A dictionary of geology, 5th ed.: Oxford University Press, 365 p. Chamberlin, R. T., 1935, Certain aspects of geologic classification and correlation: Science, v. 81, p. 183-190 and 216-218. Chamberlin, T. C., 1898, The ulterior basis of time divisions and the classification of geologic history: Jour. Geol., v. 6, p. 4 4 9 ^ 6 2 . Chamberlain, T. C., 1909, Diastrophism as the ultimate basis of correlation: Jour. Geol., v. 17, p. 685-693. Chang Chia chi, 1959, A new variant of nomenclature rules for regional stratigraphic units: Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 9, p. 432^133. Chang, K. H., 1968, A review of stratigraphic classification (with emphasis on the classi­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 158 Bibliography

fication of Korean stratigraphy): , v. 10, no. 1, p. 5-13. Chang, K. H., 1973, Toward an international guide to stratigraphic classification, termi­ nology, and usage: Geol. Soc. Korea Jour., v. 9, no. 2, p. 123-125. Chang, K. H., 1974, Origin of multiple stratigraphic classification and an unpublished 1932 manuscript by H. D. Hedberg: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 85, no. 8, p. 1301-1303. Chang, K. H., 1975, Unconformity-bounded stratigraphic units: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 86, no. 11, p. 1544-1552. Chang, K. H., 1976, On boundaries between stratigraphic systems: Research Review Kyungpook Nat. Univ., v. 21, p. 179-183. Chang, K. H., 1981, Rethinking stratigraphy: Geotimes, v. 26, no. 3, p. 23-24. Chao Yi-yang, 1959, Unification of stratigraphic terminology: Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 5, p. 229-230. Chermnykh, V. A., 1984, Paleontological zones in stratigraphy (in Russian): Komi Branch of Acad. Sci., vyp. 111, 38 p. Childs, T. S., et al., 1941, Letter to Dr. C. W. Tomlinson on stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 25, no. 12, p. 2195-2202. Chlupac, I., 1957, Zasady stratigraficke terminologie v SSSR: Vestnik Ustr. Ust. Geol., v. 32, no. 5, p. 301-308. (French translation no. 1623 by E. Jayet, SIG, Paris: Principes de la terminologie stratigraphique en SSSR, 10 p.). Chlupac, I., 1970, Chronostratigraphy and neostratotypes. Comments by Czechoslovak Stratigraphic Commission: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 54, no. 7, p. 1317. Chlupac, I., 1973, Present concepts in stratigraphical geology (in Czech): Vestnik Ustr. Ust. Geol., v. 48, no. 2, p. 65-71. Chlupac, I., H. Jaeger, and J. Zikmundova, 1972, The Silurian-Devonian boundary in the Barrandian: Canadian Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 20, no. 1, p. 104-174. Chlupac, I., H. Flugel, and H. Jaeger, 1981, Series or stages within Palaeozoic Systems?: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 10, no. 2, p. 78-91. Chlupac, I., P. Storch, and J. Tyracek (eds.), 1990, Present state of the chrono­ stratigraphic subdivision (in Czech): Cas. Mineral. Geol., v. 35, no. 3, p. 323-331. Chow Wen-fu, 1964, Some problems of the “Project of a unified stratigraphic scheme”: Nauchnyi Vestnik, no. 4, p. 364. Cicha, I., et al., 1964, Project provisoire pour une subdivision chronostratigraphique du Tertiaire: BRGM France, Mem. 28, Colloque sur le (Bordeaux, 1962), v. 2, p. 925-929. Cicha, I., J. Senes, J. Tejkal, et a l, 1969, Proposition pour la creation de neostratotypes et l'etablissement d'une echelle chronostratigraphique dite ouverte: in Com. Med. Neo­ gene Strat. Proc., 4th session (Bologna, 1967): pt. 4, Giorn. Geol., ser. 2a, v. 35, no. 4, p. 297-311. Cicha, I., and J. Senes, 1971, Probleme der Beziehung zwischen Bio- und Chrono- stratigraphie des jiingeren Tertiare: Geol. zb.-Geol. Carpathica (Slov. Akad. Vied), v. 22, no. 2, p. 209-228. Cita, M. B., 1973, Inventory of biostratigraphical findings and problems: Initial reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 13, p. 1045-1073. Cline, M. G., 1949, Basic principles of soil classification: Soil Sci., v. 67, p. 81-91. Cloud, P., 1973, Possible stratotype sequences for the basal in : Am. Jour. Sci., v. 273, no. 3, p. 193-206. Cohee, G. V. (ed.), 1962, Stratigraphic nomenclature in reports of the United States Geo­ logical Survey: U.S. Geol. Survey, 35 p.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 159

Cohee, G. V., 1968, replaces Recent in nomenclature usage of the U.S. Geological Survey: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 52, no. 5, p. 582. Cohee, G. V., 1970, Stratigraphic nomenclature, principles and procedures: in Geol. Seminar on the North Slope of Alaska: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., Proc., Pacific Section, p. H 1-H 3. Cohee, G. V. (ed.), 1974, Stratigraphic nomenclature in reports of the United States Geological Survey: U.S. Geol. Survey, 45 p. Cohee, G. V.,and J. B. Patton, 1963, Discussion of the stratigraphic code: capitalization: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 47, no. 5, p. 852-853. Cohee, G. V., R. K. DeFord, and H. B. Willman, 1969, Note 36 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Amendment of Article 5, Remarks (a) and (e) of the Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature for treatment of geologic names in a gradational or interfingering rela­ tionship of rock-stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 53, no. 9, p. 2005-2006. Cohee, G. V., M. F. Glaessner, and H. D. Hedberg (eds.), 1978, Contributions to the geo­ logic time scale: Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, 388 p. Collins, B. W., 1945, Review of “Stratigraphical classification and nomenclature” by F. R. S. Henson: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 29, no. 8, p. 1208-1211. Compston, W., 1979, The place of isotopic age determinations in stratigraphy: Episodes, v. 1979, no. 1, p. 10-13. Conkin, B. M., and J. E. Conkin (eds.), 1984, Stratigraphy— Foundations and concepts: Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 365 p. Conkin, J. E., and B. M. Conkin, 1973, The paracontinuity and the determination of the Devonian- boundary in the type Lower Mississippian area of North America: Univ. of Louisville Studies in Paleontology and Stratigraphy no. 1, 36 p. Conybeare, W. D., and W. Phillips, 1822, Outlines of the geology of and Wales, Part I: London, 470 p. (see Introduction, p. i-lxi.) Cook, H. E., 1975, North American stratigraphic principles as applied to deep-sea sedi­ ments: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 59, no. 5, p. 817-837. Corrales Zarauza, I., et al., 1977, Estratigraffa: Editorial Rueda, Madrid, 718 p. Cotton, C. A., 1950, Discordant time scales: Science, v. 111, p. 14-15. Cowie, J. W., 1986, Guidelines for boundary stratotypes: Episodes, v. 9, no. 2, p. 78-82. Cowie, J. W., et al., 1986, Guidelines and statutes of the International Commission on Stratigraphy (ICS): Cour. Forsch.— Inst. Senckenberg, no. 83, p. 1-14. Cox, A. V., R. R. Doell, and G. B. Dalrymple, 1964, Reversals of the Earth's magnetic field: Science, v. 144, no. 3626, p. 1537-1543. Cracraft, H., and N. Eldredge (eds.), 1979, Phylogeny analysis and paleontology: Columbia Univ. Press, 233 p. (Review by S. Bengtson in Lethaia, v. 13, no. 3, p. 276.) Crook, K. A. W., 1962, A note on stratigraphical nomenclature— biostratigraphic zones and time-rock stages: Royal Soc. New South Wales, v. 96, p. 15-16. Crook, K. A. W., 1966, Principles of Precambrian time-stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 13, pt. 1, p. 195-202. Cross, T. A., and M. A. Lessenger, 1988, Seismic stratigraphy: Ann. Review Earth Plane­ tary Sci., v. 16, p. 319-354. Cross, W., 1902, Geologic formations versus lithologic individuals: Jour. Geol., v. 10, no. 2, p. 223-244. Csema, Z. de, 1972, Essay review of “Stratigraphie und Stratotypus” by O. H. Schinde­ wolf: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 272, no. 2, p. 189-194.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 160 Bibliography

Cubbit, J. M., and R. A. Reyment (eds.), 1982, Quantitative stratigraphic correlation: John Wiley & Sons, New York, 301 p. Cumings, E. R., 1930, List of species from the New Corydon, Kokomo, and Kenneth for­ mations of Indiana, and for reefs in the Mississinewa and Liston Creek formations: Indiana Acad. Sci. Proc., v. 39, p. 204-211. Cumings, E. R., 1932, Reefs or bioherms: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 43, p. 331-352. Cumings, E. R., and R. R. Shrock, 1928, Niagaran coral reefs in Indiana and adjacent states and their stratigraphic relations: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 39, p. 579-619. Cuvillier, J., 1951, Correlations stratigraphiques par microfacies en Aquitaine occiden- tale: E. J. Brill, Leiden, 23 p., 90 plates. Dagley, P., et al., 1967, Geomagnetic polarity zones for Icelandic : Nature, v. 216, no. 5110, p. 25-29. Dana, J. D., 1856, On American geological history: Am. Jour. Sci., 2nd ser., v. 22, no. 66, p. 305-334. DeFord, R. K., 1957, Discussion of Report 5 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)—Nature, usage, and nomenclature of biostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1887. DeFord, R. K., J. A. W ilson, and F. M. Swain, 1967, Note 35 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Application to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature for an amendment of Article 3 and Article 13, Remarks (c) and (e) of the Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature to disallow recognition of new stratigraphic names that appear only in abstracts, guidebooks, microfilms, newspapers, or in commercial trade journals: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 51, no. 9, p. 1868-1869. Desnoyers, J., 1829, Observations sur un ensemble de depots marins plus recents que les terrains tertairies du bassin de la Seine, et constituant un formation geologique dis- tincte, precedees d’une apenju de la nonsimultaneite des bassins : Anal. Sci. Nat., v. 16, p. 171-214, 402-491. Detre, Cs., 1976, Stratigraphy and evolution: Foldtani Kozlony (Hungarian Geol. Soc. Bull.), v. 106, p. 30-41. Dewalque, C., 1882, Sur l'unification de la nomenclature geologique— Resume et conclu­ sions: 2nd Int. Geol. Cong. (Bologne, 1881), C. R., p. 549-559. Dewalque, C., et al., 1888, Rapports de la Commission pour l'uniformite de la nomencla­ ture: 3rd Int. Geol. Cong. (Berlin, 1885) C. R., p. 317-399. Diener, C., 1909, Summary: in Krafft, A. v., and C. Diener, Lower Triassic Cephalopoda from Spiti, Malla Johar., and Byans: Geol. Survey India (Pal. Ind.) ser. 15, v. 6, Mem. 1, 186 p. (seep. 163-186.) Diener, C., 1918, Die Bedeutung der Zonengliederung fur die Frage der Zeitmessung in der Erdgeschichte: Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., Palaont., Beilage- Bd. 42, p. 65-172. Diener, C., 1925, Grundziige derBiostratigraphie: Deuticke, Leipzig, 304 p. Dienes, I., 1978, Formalized stratigraphy: basic concepts and advantages: Pergamon Computers Geol. v. 2, p. 81-87. Dienes, I., and C. J. Mann, 1977, Mathematical formulation of stratigraphic terminology: Mathematical Geology, v. 9, no. 6, p. 587-603. Dineley, D. L., 1964, The chronological value of fossils: in Geochronology of Canada (F. F. Osborne, ed.): Royal Soc. Canada Spec. Pub. 8, Univ. Toronto Press, p. 9-19. Ding Pei-zhen, 1958, On the use of time-rock units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 18, no. 3, p. 245-246. Ding Pei-zhen, 1959, Concepts of the new Stratigraphic Code of China (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 9, p. 433^134.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 161

Dollo, L., 1909, La paleontologie ethologique: Soc. Beige Geol. Paleont., Hydrolog. Bull., v. 23, p. 377^121. Donovan, D. T., 1966, Stratigraphy, an introduction to principles: Murby, London, 199 p. Dott, R. H., Jr., and R. L. Batten, 1971, The relative geologic time scale and modern stratigraphic principles: in Evolution o f the Earth: McGraw-Hill, New York, 649 p. (see p. 53-75.) Douglas, R. J. W., 1980, On the age of rocks and Precambrian time scales: Geology, v. 8, no. 4, p. 167-171. Doutch, H. F., 1976, Formal lithostratigraphy for sedimentary rocks: a code based on some underdeveloped principles: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 23, pt. 1, p. 67-72. Dragunov, V. I., 1962, On building of geohistorical scale of evolution of the earth's crust in connection with problems of stratigraphy, taxonomy and nomenclature of the late Pre-Cambrian deposits (in Russian): in Sovescanie po problemam astrogeologii, Leningrad, p. 148-151. Dreyfuss, M., 1953, La notion d'etage geologique et les variations locales de la subsid­ ence: Soc. Hist. Nat. du Doubs Bull., no. 57, p. 105-110. Dreyfuss, M., 1962, Reflexions sur quelques “unites” employees en stratigraphie et en paleontologie: BRGM, France, Dept. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., v. 14, no. 56, p. 1-5. Drooger, C. W., 1969, Voltooid verleden tija, heden en toekomst (Past, present, and fu­ ture): Inaugural dissertation, Univ. o f Utrecht: Schotanus & Jons, Utrecht, p. 1-16. Drooger, C. W., 1974, The boundaries and limits of stratigraphy: Koninklijke Nederl. Akad. Wetenschappen, Amsterdam, Proc. Series B., v. 77, no. 3, p. 159-176. Dunbar, C. O., 1972, Stratigraphic boundaries and problems in their selection: in The age of the Dunkard, Proc. of First I. C. Memorial Symposium (J. A. Barlow, ed.): Geol. and Economic Surv., Morgantown, p. 3-6. Dunbar, C. O., and J. Rodgers, 1957, Principles of stratigraphy: John Wiley and Sons, N ew York, 356 p. Dunn, P. R., K. A. Plumb, and H. G. Roberts, 1966, A proposal for time-stratigraphic subdivision of the Australian Precambrian: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 13, pt. 2, p. 593-608. Dunn, P. R., B. P. Thomson, and K. Rankama, 1971, Late Pre-Cambrian glaciation in Australia as a stratigraphic boundary: Nature, v. 231, no. 5304, p. 498-502. Eaton, J. E., 1931, Standards of correlation: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 15, no. 4, p. 367-384. (Discussion by F. A. Melton and reply by J. E. Eaton: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 16, no. 10, p. 1039-1044, 1932). Eaton, J. E., 1932, Time-equivalent versus lithologic extension of formations: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 16, no. 10, p. 1043-1044. Eaton, J. E., 1941, Reply to discussion by H. D. Hedberg of “Technique of stratigraphic nomenclature” by C. W. Tomlinson: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 25, no. 12, p. 2208-2210. Eckel, E. C., 1901, The formation as the basis for geologic mapping: Jour. Geol., v. 9, p. 708-717. Egoyan, V. L., 1973, Stratotype and stratigraphic boundary (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 2, p. 107-112. Egoyan, V. L., 1978, Principles of drawing the boundaries of units of the international stratigraphic scale: in Problems of a stage-by-stage evolution of the organic world, Trans, of the XVIII Session of the All-Union Paleont. Society, “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 40^19.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 162 Bibliography

Egoyan, V. L., 1987, Tendencies in general stratigraphy development, 2: Inde­ pendent scales and problem of purpose in stratigraphy (in Russian): Moscow Society of Natural Investigators, Dept, of Geol. Bull., vol. 62, no. 5, p. 24-36. Eicher, D. L., 1976, Geologic time (2nd ed.): Prentice-Hall, New York, 150 p. Einsele, G., and A. Seilacher, 1982, Cyclic and event stratification: Springer-Verlag, Ber­ lin, 536 p. Eldredge, N., and S. J. Gould, 1977, Evolution models and biostratigraphic strategies, in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 25—40. Elias, M. K., 1945, Geological (Indications of periodicity in nature and succes­ sion of geological periods): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 29, no. 7, p. 1035-1043. Ellenberg, J., F. Falk, and E. Grumbt, 1981, Moglichkeiten und Grenzen lithostrati- graphischer Korrelation: Zeitschr. geol. Wiss., v. 9, no. 8, p. 805-816. Ellenberger, F., 1972, Quelques remarques historiques sur “la maladie infantile” de la stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methods et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, p. 27-30. Enay, R., 1962, La nomenclature stratigraphique du Jurassique terminal, ses problemes et sa normalisation: BRGM France, Dept. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., v. 15, no. 57, p. 1-9. Enay, R. (ed.), 1971, Problemes de zonation de quelques etages du Jurassique en , Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 511-512. Epshteyn, S. V., 1961, On the question of principles and methods of stratigraphic subdi­ vision of the Quaternary System (in Russian): Mat. VSEGEI, vyp. 42, p. 19-36. Erben, H. K., 1959, Fortschritte der Palaontologie im letzten Jahrzehnt: Naturwiss. Rundschau, Jahrg. 12, H. 4, p. 119-124. Erben, H. K., 1961, Ergebnisse der 2. Arbeitstagung liber die Silur/-Grenze und die Stratigraphie von Silur und Devon: Bonn und Brussel (1960): Deutsche Geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., Bd. 113, no. 1, p. 81-84. Erben, H. K. (ed.), 1962, Internationale Arbeitstagung iiber die Silur/Devon-Grenze und die Stratigraphie von Silur und Devon: Bonn-Bruxelles (1960), Stuttgart, 315 p. Erben, H. K., 1972a, Comments on lithostratigraphic and stratotype reports of the IUGS International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 2, no. 2, p. 77-78. Erben, H. K., 1972b, Replies to opposing statements: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 2, no. 2, p. 79-95. (Discussion by H. D. Hedberg and reply by H. K. Erben: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 2, no. 4, p. 181-188.) Ericson, D. B., M. Ewing, and G. Wollin, 1963, Pliocene-Pleistocene boundary in deep- sea sediments: Science, v. 139, no. 3556, p. 727-737. Evernden, J. F., and R. K. S. Evemden, 1970, The Cenozoic time scale: Geol. Soc. Amer­ ica Spec. Paper 124, p. 71-90. Eysinga, F. W. B. van, 1970, Stratigraphic terminology and nomenclature; a guide for ed­ itors and authors: Earth-Science Reviews, v. 6, no. 4, p. 267-288. Fairbridge, R. W., 1954, Stratigraphic classification by micro-facies: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 252, no. 11, p. 683-694. Faul, H., 1960, Geologic time scale: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 71, no. 5, p. 637-644. Faul, H., 1978, A history of geologic time: American Scientist, v. 66, p. 159-165. Fenton, C. L., and M. A. Fenton, 1928, Ecologic interpretation of some biostratigraphic terms, Part 1, Faunule and zonule: Am. Midland Naturalist, v. 11, no. 1, p. 1-23.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 163

Fenton, C. L., and M. A. Fenton, 1930, Ecologic interpretation of some biostratigraphic terms, Part 2, Zone, subzone, facies, phase: Am. Midland Naturalist, v. 12, no. 5, p. 145— 153. Fiege, K., 1926, Die palaontologischen Grundlagen der geologischen Zeitmessung: Naturwiss. Mh., v. 24, p. 77-91, Leipzig. Fiege, K., 1951, The zone, base of biostratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 35, no. 12, p. 2582-2596. Fiege, K., 1969, Sedimentationzyklen als Zeitmarken: Deutsche Geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 118 (1966), pt. 2, p. 260-265. Fisher, A. G., H. E. Wheeler, and V. S. Mallory, 1954, Arbitrary cut-off in stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 38, no. 5, p. 926-931. Fisher, D. W., 1956, Intricacy of applied stratigraphic nomenclature: Jour. Geol., v. 64, no. 6, p. 617-627. Fisunenko, O. P., 1974, Problems of correlation: Trudy Sev.-Vost. Kompleks. Inst. USSR Acad. Sci., vyp. 62, p. 50-59. Forgotson, J. M., Jr., 1957, Nature, usage and definition of marker-defined vertically seg­ regated rock units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 9, p. 2108-2113. (Discussion by P. F. Moore: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 2, p. 447-450, 1958.) Foster, N. H„ 1966, Stratigraphic leak: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 50, no. 12, p. 2604-2611. Frank, M., 1938, Zur Frage der Richtprofile: Deutsche Geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 90, p. 227-230. Franke, D., 1962, Zu Fragen geologischer Terminologie und Klassifikation: (I) Der Begriff Formation: Zeitschr., Angew. Geol., v. 8, no. 4, p. 208-214. Franke, D., 1963, Zu Fragen geologischer Terminologie und Klassifikation: (II) Der Begriff Fazies: (1. Teil), Zeitschr. Angew. Geol., H. 1, p. 39-45; (2. Teil), Zeitschr. Angew. Geol., H. 2, p. 97-102; (3. Teil), Zeitschr. Angew. Geol., H. 3, p. 153-157. Frebold, H., 1924, Ammonitenzonen und Sedimentationszyklen in ihrer Beziehung zueinander: Centralbl. fur Miner., Geol. Palaont. Jahrg. 1924, p. 313-320. Freeh, F., 1899 Uber Abgrenzung und Benennung der geologischen Schichtengruppen: 7th Int. Geol. Cong. (St. Petersburg, 1897), p. 27-52. Frye, J. C., and A. B. Leonard, 1953, Definition of time line separating a glacial and in­ terglacial age in the Pleistocene: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 37, no. 11, p. 2581-2586. Frye, J. C., and G. M. Richmond, 1958, Note 20 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Problems in applying standard stratigraphic practice in nonmarine Quaternary de­ posits: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 8, p. 1979-1983. Frye, J. C., and H. B. Willman, 1960, Classification of the Wisconsinan Stage in the Lake Michigan glacial lobe: Illinois State Geological Survey Circular 285, 16 p. Frye, J. C., and H. B. Willman, 1962, Note 27 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Morphostratigraphic units in Pleistocene stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 46, no. 1, P- 112-113. (Discussion by G. M. Richmond: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 46, no. 8, p. 1520-1521,1962.) Fiichsel, G. C., 1761, Historia terrae et maris, ex historia Thuringiae per montium de- scriptionem: Actorum Academiae Electoralis Moguntinae Scientiarum Utilium, quae Erfordiae Est. t. 2, p. 44-208. Fuller, J. G. C. M., 1969, The industrial basis of stratigraphy: John Strachey, 1671-1743, and William Smith, 1769-1839: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 53, no. 11, p. 2256-2273.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 164 Bibliography

Gabilly, J., 1971, Methodes et modeles en stratigraphie du Jurassique: Colloque du Juras- sique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 5-16. Gage, M., 1966, Geological divisions of time: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 9, no. 4, p. 399^107. Ganeshin, G. S., et al., 1961, Volume, contents and terminology of stratigraphic subdivi­ sions of the Quaternary System (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 8, p. 3-15. Gealy, E. L., E. L. Winterer, and R. Moberly, Jr., 1971, Methods, conventions, and gen­ eral observations: Initial reports of Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 7, pt. 1, p. 9-26. Geczy, B., 1964, Szint, Eletszint, Odoszint (Zone, biozon, chronozone): Foldtani Koz- lony, v. 94, p. 132-135. Geikie, A., 1885, Text-book of geology, 2nd ed., Macmillan, London, 992 p. (see p. 626-631.) Gekker, R. F., 1956, On the question of methods of biostratigraphy (in Russian): Geol. Sbornik, no. 2-3, Lvov., p. 137-157. Geological Society of China (Taiwan), Commission on unity of stratigraphic nomencla­ ture, 1961, The principle of stratigraphic nomenclature in China (in Chinese): Geol. Soc. China Proc., no. 3, p. 2-5. Geological Society of London, 1967, Report of the Stratigraphical Code Sub-Committee, T. N. George et al.: Geol. Soc. London Proc. 1638, p. 75-87. George, T. N., 1956, Biospecies, chronospecies and morphospecies: Systematics Asso­ ciation Publication 2, p. 123-137. George, T. N., 1960, Fossils in evolutionary perspective: Science Progress, v. 48, no. 189, 28 p. George, T. N., 1965, Stratigraphical systems: Report on discussion in Kashmir: Geol. Soc. London Proc. 1624, p. 109-113. George, T. N., and R. H. Wagner, 1972, IUGS Subcommission on Stratigraphy, Proceedings and Report of the General Assembly at Krefeld, August 21-22, 1971: 7me Congres Carbonifere (Krefeld, 1971), C. R., v. I, p. 139-147. Geyer, O. F., 1973, Grundziige der Stratigraphie und Fazieskunde, v. 1, Stuttgart, 279 p. (see particularly III Stratigraphie und Geochronologie, p. 177-259.) Gignoux, M., 1926, Geologie stratigraphique: Masson, Paris, 588 p. Gignoux, M., 1936, Geologie stratigraphique: Masson, Paris, 709 p. Gignoux, M., 1950, Geologie stratigraphique: Masson, Paris, 735 p. Gignoux, M., 1955, Stratigraphic geology (English translation by G. G. Woodford of the 1950 French edition of “Geologie Stratigraphique”): W. H. Freeman, San Francisco, 682 p. Gignoux, M., 1960, Geologie stratigraphique: Masson, Paris, 759 p. Gilluly, J., 1949, Distribution of mountain building in geologic time: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 60, no. 4, p. 561-590. Gladenkov, Yu. B., 1972, Some controversial problems in stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 115-124. Gladenkov, Yu. B., 1978, The ecosystem approach in stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 1, p. 5-23. Gladenkov, Yu. B., 1980, The problem of suites, zones and stratohorizons in stratigraphy (comments on some sections of the “Stratigraphic Code of the USSR”) (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification—Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 124-130. Gladenkov, Yu. B., 1981, Debatable problems of stratigraphic classification: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 9, no. 3, p. 169-175.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 165

Gladenkov, Yu. B„ 1983, Realities of rock bodies correlation on ecostratigraphic basis (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 9, p. 69-83. Glaessner, M. F., 1945, Principles of micropaleontology: Melbourne Univ. Press, Aus­ tralia, 296 p. (see particularly p. 213-226.) Glaessner, M. F., 1953, Time-stratigraphy and the : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 64, no. 6, p. 647-658. Glaessner, M. F., 1954, Time-stratigraphy of the late Pre-Cambrian: Pan Indian Ocean Sci. Cong. Proc., sec. C, p. 66-68. Glaessner, M. F., 1960, West-Pacific stratigraphic correlation: Nature, v. 186, no. 4730, p. 1039-1040. Glaessner, M. F., 1963, The dating of the base of the Cambrian: Geol. Soc. India Jour., v. 4, p. 1-11. Glass, B., et al., 1967, Geomagnetic reversals and Pleistocene chronology: Nature, v. 216, p. 437-442. Glen, W., 1982, The road to Jaramillo: Stanford Univ. Press, 459 p. Glumicic-Holland, N., and Z. Boskov-Stajner, 1967, Stratigraphic classification and ter­ minology, Copenhagen 1961: “Nafta,” v. 18, nos. 3-4, p. 95-111. Gordon, W. A., 1962, Problems of paleontological correlation with particular reference to Tertiary: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 46, no. 3, p. 394-398. Gorsky, I. I., 1957, Biostratigraphy and geochronology of continental deposits (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 12, p. 33-46. Grabau, A. W., 1913, Principles of stratigraphy: A. G. Seiler and Co., New York, 1185 p. (see particularly p. 1097-1150.) Gradstein, F. M., et al., 1985, Quantitative stratigraphy: Kluwer Academic Publ., Hing- ham, Massachusetts, 632 p. Gray, H. H., 1958, Definition of term formation in stratigraphic sense: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 2, p. 451^-52. Greenough, G. B., 1819, A critical examination of the first : Strahan and Spottiswoode, London, 336 p. Gregory, J. W., and B. H. Barrett, 1913, General stratigraphy: Methuen & Co., London, 285 p. Gressly, A., 1838, Observations geologiques sur le Jura soleurois: Soc. Helv. Sci. Nat. (Neuchatel), Nouv. Mem., v. 2, 349 p. (see particularly p. 8-26.) Griffiths, J. C., 1949, Discussion: in Sedimentary facies in geologic history (C. R. Longwell, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Mem. 39, p. 140-141. Grigelis, A. A., 1980, Chronozones and phylozones, their characteristic features, similari­ ties and differences (based on data on the Jurassic and Cretaceous foraminifers) (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., geol. ser., no. 4, p. 57-67. Gromov, V. I., et al., 1960, Principles of a stratigraphic subdivision of the Quaternary (Anthropogen) System and its lower boundary: 21st Int. Geol. Cong. (Norden, 1960), pt. 4, p. 7-26. Gubler, Y., 1972, Stratigraphie et sedimentologie, introduction et rapport de synthese: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 523-534. Gurari, F. G., 1969, Rules of stratigraphic classification (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.), Trudy, SNIGGIMS, p. 66-78, Novosibirsk. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratig­ raphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 56-67.). Gurari, F. G., 1980, Stratigraphy: objects, purposes and methods of investigation, urgent

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 166 Bibliography

problems (in Russian): in Problems of stratigraphy of in the light of recent data: Collected scientific papers o f the SNIGGIMS, vyp. 282, p. 4-18. Gurari, F. G., 1984, On some problems of stratigraphy (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 5, p. 6-11. Gurari, F. G., 1986, Lithostratigraphic units: in Regional and local stratigraphic units for the purpose of large-scale geological mapping of Siberia: Novosibirsk, p. 21-29. Guryev, Yu. A., 1988, On the least basic unit of local stratigraphic scale (as a matter for discussion of the Stratigraphic Code of the USSR) (in Russian): Tectonics and Stra­ tigraphy, no. 29, p. 30-35. Flallam, A., 1981, Facies interpretation and the stratigraphic record: W. H. Freeman, Oxford and San Francisco, 291 p. Hammen, T. van der, 1965 (1964) Palaoklima, Stratigraphie und Evolution: Geol. Rund­ schau, v. 54, no. 1, p. 428—441. Hancock, J. M., 1966, Theoretical and real stratigraphy: Geol. Mag., v. 103, no. 2, p. 179. Hancock, J. M., 1977, The historic development of concepts of biostratigraphic correla­ tion: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 3-22. Hansen, W. R. (ed.), 1991, Suggestions to authors of the reports of the United States Geological Survey, 7th ed.: U.S. Geological Survey, 289 p. Haq, B. U., J. Hardenbol, and P. R. Vail, 1987, Chronology of fluctuating sea levels since the Triassic (250 million years ago to present): Science, v. 235, p. 1156-1167. (Com­ ments by N. Christie-Blick, G. S. Mountain, and K. G. Miller; by R. K. Mathews; and by F. M. Gradstein et al.; and responses: Science, v. 241, p. 596-602, 1988.) Haq, B. U., J. Hardenbol, and P. R. Vail, 1988, Mesozoic and Cenozoic chrono­ stratigraphy and cycles of sea-level change: in Sea level changes: an integrated ap­ proach (C. K. Wilgus et al., eds.): Soc. Economic Paleont. Mineralogists Spec. Publ. 42, p. 71-108. Harbaugh, J. W., 1968, Stratigraphy and geologic time: William C. Brown Company, Dubuque, Iowa, 113 p. Hardenbol, J., and W. A. Berggren, 1978, A new Paleogene numerical time scale, in Con­ tributions to the geologic time scale (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner and H. D. Hed- berg, eds.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 213-234. Harland, W. B., 1967, Review of “Stratigraphy, an introduction to principles” by D. T. Donovan: Geol. Mag., v. 104, no. 2, p. 192-194. Harland, W. B., 1968, On the principle of a Late Pre-Cambrian stratigraphical standard scale: 23rd Int. Geol. Cong. (Prague, 1968), v. 4, p. 253-264. Harland, W. B., 1969, Interpretation of stratigraphical ages in orogenic belts: in Time and place in orogeny (P. E. Kent, G. E. Satterthwaite, and A. M. Spencer, eds.): Geol. Soc. London, Spec. Publ. 3, p. 115-135. Harland, W. B., 1970, Time, space and rock (An essay on some fundamentals of stratig­ raphy): West Commemoration Volume: Today & 's Printers & Publishers, Paridabad, India, p. 17-42. Harland, W. B., 1971, Introduction to the time-scale (A supplement): Geol. Soc. London, Special Pub. 5, p. 3-7. Harland, W. B., 1973, Stratigraphic classification, terminology and usage— essay review of “An International Guide to Stratigraphic Classification, terminology and usage, Introduction and Summary (H. D. Hedberg, ed.)”: Geol. Mag., v. 110, no. 6, p. 567-574. Harland, W. B., 1974, The Pre-Cambrian-Cambrian boundary: in Cambrian of the British

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 167

Isles, Norden and Spitsbergen (C. H. Holland, ed.), v. 2 of Lower Palaeozoic rocks of the world: John Wiley, London, p. 15-42. Harland, W. B., 1975, The two geological time scales: Nature, v. 253, p. 505-507. Harland, W. B., 1977, International Stratigraphic Guide, essay review: Geol. Mag., v. 114, no. 3, p. 229-235. Harland, W. B., 1978, Geochronologic scales: in Contributions to the geologic time scale (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner, and H. D. Hedberg, eds.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 9-32. Harland, W. B., 1992, Stratigraphic regulation and guidance: A critique of current ten­ dencies in stratigraphic codes and guides: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 104, no. 10, p. 1231-1235. Harland, W. B., A. G. Smith, and B. Wilcock (eds.), 1964, The Phanerozoic time-scale: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 120s, 458 p. Harland, W. B., E. H. Francis, and P. Evans (eds.), 1971, The Phanerozoic time-scale, a supplement: Geol. Soc. London Special Publ. 5, 356 p. Harland, W. B., eta l., 1982, A geologic time scale: Cambridge Univ. Press, 131 p. Harland, W. B., et al., 1990, A geologic time scale 1989: Cambridge Univ. Press, 163 p. Harper, C. W., Jr., 1980, Relative age inference in paleontology: Lethaia, v. 13, no. 3, p. 239-248. Harrington, H. J., 1965, Space, things, time and events— an essay on stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 49, no. 10, p. 1601-1646. Harrison, J. E., and Z. E. Peterman, 1980, Note 52 (of North Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.) —A preliminary proposal for a chronometric time scale for the Precambrian of the United States and Mexico: Geol. Soc. America Bull., Part I, v. 91, no. 6, p. 377-380. Harrison, J. E., and Z. E. Peterman, 1982, Report 9 (of North Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Adoption of geochronometric units of division of Precambrian time: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 66, no. 6, p. 801-804. Haug, E., 1911, Traite de geologie, II—Les periodes geologiques: Colin, Paris, p. 539-928. (see particularly p. 539-564, Principes generaux de la stratigraphie.) Hay, W. W., 1972, Probabilistic stratigraphy: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 65, no. 2, p. 255-266. Hay, W. W., 1974, Implications of probabilistic stratigraphy for chronostratigraphy: in Contributions to the geology and paleobiology of the Caribbean and adjacent areas: Kugler Festschrift Volume (P. Jung, ed.): Verhandl. Naturf. Ges. Basel, v. 84, no. 1, p. 164-171. Hay, W. W., and P. Cepek, 1969, Nannofossils, probability, and biostratigraphic resolu­ tion (abstr.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 53, no. 3, p. 721. Hay, W. W., and J. R. Southam, 1978, Quantifying biostratigraphic correlation: Ann. Rev. Earth Planetary Sci., v. 6, p. 353-375. Hayami, I., 1973, An evolutionary interpretation of biostratigraphic zones (in Japanese with abstract in English): Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 79, no. 3, p. 219-235. Hayami, I., and T. Ozawa, 1975, Evolutionary models of lineage-zones: Lethaia, v. 8, no. 1, p. 1-14. Hays, J. D., 1971, Faunal extinction and reversals of the earth's magnetic field: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 82, no. 9, p. 2433-2447. Hays, J. D., and N. D. Opdyke, 1967, Antarctic radiolaria, magnetic reversals, and cli­ matic change: Science, v. 158, no. 3804, p. 1001-1011. Hays, J. D., et al., 1969, Pliocene-Pleistocene sediments of the equatorial Pacific: their paleomagnetic, biostratigraphic, and climatic record: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 80, no. 8, p. 1481-1513.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 168 Bibliography

Hays, J. D., and W. A. Berggren, 1971, Quaternary boundaries and correlations: in The micropaleontology of oceans (B. M. Funnel and W. R. Riedel, eds.): Cambridge Univ. Press, p. 669-691. Hazel, J. E., 1970, Binary coefficients and clustering in biostratigraphy: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 81, no. 11, p. 3237-3252. Hazel, J. E., 1977, Use of certain multivariate and other techniques in assemblage zonal biostratigraphy: examples utilizing Cambrian, Cretaceous and Tertiary benthic inver­ tebrates: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. C. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 187-212. Hebert, E., 1881, Nomenclature et classification geologiques: Rapport du Comite Frangais, Commission pour l'unification de la nomenclature geologique, Ann. Sci. Geol., v. 11, no. 10, art. 4, p. 1-15. Hedberg, H. D., 1937, Stratigraphy of the Rio Querecual section of northeastern Vene­ zuela: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 48, no. 12, p. 1971-2024. (see section entitled “Some Stratigraphic Principles,” p. 1975-1977.) Hedberg, H. D., 1941, Discussion of “Technique of stratigraphic nomenclature”, by C. W. Tomlinson: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 25, no. 12, p. 2202-2206. Hedberg, H. D., 1948, Time-stratigraphic classification of sedimentary rocks: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 5, p. 447-462. Hedberg, H. D., 1951, Nature of time-stratigraphic units and geologic time units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 35, no. 5, p. 1077-1081. Hedberg, H. D., 1954, Procedure and terminology in stratigraphic classification: 19th Int. Geol. Cong. (Algiers, 1952), fasc. 13, p. 205-233. Hedberg, H. D., 1958, Stratigraphic classification and terminology: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 8, p. 1881-1896. Hedberg, H. D., 1959a, Stratigraphic classification and terminology: Alberta Soc. Petro­ leum Geol. Jour., v. 6, no. 8, p. 192-208. Hedberg, H. D., 1959b, Toward harmony in stratigraphic classification: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 674-683. Hedberg, H. D., 1961a, The stratigraphic panorama (an inquiry into the bases for age de­ termination and age classification of the earth’s rock strata): Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 72, no. 4, p. 499-518. Hedberg, H. D., 1961b, Stratigraphic classification of and coal-bearing sediments: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 72, no. 7, p. 1081-1088. Hedberg, H. D., 1962, Les zones stratigraphiques— Remarques sur un article de P. Hupe: BRGM France, Serv. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., 14th , no. 54, p. 6-11. Hedberg, H. D., 1965a, Earth history and the record of the rocks: Am. Philosophical Soc. Proc., v. 109, no. 2, p. 99-104. Hedberg, H. D., 1965b, Chronostratigraphy and biostratigraphy: Geol. Mag., v. 102, no. 5, p. 451^161. Hedberg, H. D., 1966, Note 33 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)—Application to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature for amendments to Articles 29, 31, and 37 to provide for recognition of erathem, substage, and chronozone as time-stratigraphic terms in the Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Pe­ troleum Geol. Bull., v. 50, no. 3, p. 560-561. Hedberg, H. D., 1967a, Geochronology (stratigraphic): in International Dictionary of Geophysics (S. K. Runcorn, ed.), v. 1: Pergamon Press, Elsmford, New York, p. 561-567. Hedberg, H. D., 1967b, Geologic periods and systems: in International Dictionary of

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 169

Geophysics (S. K. Runcorn, ed.), v. 1: Pergamon Press, Elmsford, New York, p. 600-605. Hedberg, H. D., 1967c, Status of stratigraphic classification and terminology: IUGS Geol. Newsletter, v. 167, no. 3, p. 16-29. Hedberg, H. D., 1968a, Comments with respect to the Precambrian part of the geochrono­ logic time scale: C. R. Edmonton meeting of IUGS Commission on Geochronology, June 17, 1967, Annexe 1, p. 21-25. Hedberg, H. D., 1968b, Some views on chronostratigraphic classification: Geol. Mag., v. 105, no. 2, p. 192-199. Hedberg, H. D., 1969a, Review of “Chronostratigraphie und neostratotypen”: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 53, no. 10, pt. I, p. 2203-2206. Hedberg, H. D., 1969b, The influence of Torbem Bergman (1735-1784) on stratigraphy: Acta Univ. Stockholmiensis, Stockholm Contributions in Geology, v. 20, no. 2, p. 19-47. Hedberg, H. D., 1970, Stratigraphic boundaries— a reply: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 63, no. 2, p. 673-684. Hedberg, H. D., 1971, Recently published reports of the International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 1, no. 4, p. 59-60. Hedberg, H. D., 1973a, Impressions from a discussion of the ISSC International Strati­ graphic Guide, Hannover, October 18, 1972: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 2, no. 4, p. 173-180. Hedberg, H. D., 1973b, Reaction to an attack by Professor H. K. Erben on the International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification and its philosophy: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 2, no. 4, p. 181-184. Hedberg, H. D., 1974, Basis for chronostratigraphic classification of the Precambrian: Precambrian Research, v. 1, no. 3, p. 165-177. Hedberg, H. D., (ed.), 1976, International Stratigraphic Guide— A guide to stratigraphic classification, terminology and procedure: John Wiley and Sons, New York, 200 p. Hedberg, H. D., 1978, Stratotypes and an international geochronologic scale: in Con­ tributions to the geologic time scale (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner, and H. D. Hedberg, eds.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 33-38. Heilprin, A., 1887, The classification of the Post-Cretaceous deposits: Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia Proc., p. 314-322. Heim, A., 1934, Stratigraphische Kondensation: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 27, no. 2, p. 372-383. Heirtzler, J. R., et al., 1968, Marine magnetic anomalies, geomagnetic field reversals, and motions of the ocean floor and continents: Jour. Geophys. Research, v. 73, no. 6, p. 2119-2136. Heiskanen, W. A., 1967, Geochronology (stratigraphic): in International Dictionary of Geophysics (S. K. Runcorn, ed.), v. 1: Pergamon Press, Elmsford, New York, p. 561-567. Henbest, L. G., 1952, Significance of evolutionary explosions for diastrophic division of earth history— Introduction to the Symposium: Jour. Paleontology, v. 26, no. 3, p. 299-318. Henningsmoen, G., 1955, Om navn pa stratigrafiske enheter: Norges Geol. Undersdkelse, no. 191, p. 5-17. Henningsmoen, G., 1961, Remarks on stratigraphic classification: Norges Geol. Undersd­ kelse, no. 213, p. 62-92. Henningsmoen, G., 1964, Zig-zag evolution: Norsk Geologisk Tidsskrift, v. 44, pt. 3, p. 341-352.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 170 Bibliography

Henningsmoen, G., 1973, The Cambro-Ordovician boundary: Lethaia, v. 6, no. 4, p. 423-139. Henson, F. R. S., 1944, Stratigraphic classification and nomenclature: Geol. Mag., v. 81, no. 4, p. 166-169. (Review by B. W. Collins: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 29, no. 8, p. 1208-1211, 1945.) Herak, M., 1975, Some comments on stratigraphic classification and terminology: Geoloski Vjesnik, sv. 28, p. 55-63. Hoffman, A., 1981, Stochastic versus deterministic approach to paleontology: the ques­ tion of scaling or metaphysics: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Abh., v. 162, no. 1, p. 80-96. Hoffman, A., 1982, Community evolution and stratigraphy: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 11, no. 1, p. 32-36. Hohn, M. E., 1978, Stratigraphic correlation by principal components: effects of missing data: Jour. Geol., v. 86, no. 4, p. 524-532. Holder, H., 1960, Geologie und Palaontologie in Texten und ihrer Geschichte: K. Alber, Freiberg/Miinchen, 565 p. (see p. 439—446.) Holder, H., 1964, Jura: Handbuch der Stratigraphischen Geologie, v. 4, F. Enke, Stutt­ gart, 603 p. (see p. 1-10). Holder, H., 1971, Grundsatzliches zur Jura-Gliederung: Colloque du Jurassique (Luxem­ bourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 69-74. Holder, H., 1979, Wesen, Moglichkeiten und Grenzen der Biostratigraphie (Nature, pos­ sibilities and limitations of biostratigraphy): Newsl. Stratigr., v. 7, no. 3, p. 171-192. Holder, H., and A. Zeiss, 1972, Zu der gegenwartigen Diskussion iiber Prinzipien und Methoden der Stratigraphie: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., Jg. 1972, H. 7, p. 385-399. Holland, C. H., 1962, Diskussion zur Silur/Devon-Grenze: Symposium Silur/Devon Grenze (Stuttgart, 1960), p. 304. Holland, C. H., 1964, Stratigraphical classification: Science Progress, v. 52, no. 207, p. 439-451. Holland, C. H., 1965, The Siluro-Devonian boundary: Geol. Mag., v. 102, no. 3, p. 213-221. Holland, C. H., 1978, Stratigraphical classification and all that: Lethaia, v. 11, no. 1, p. 85-90. (Comment by J. T. Temple: Lethaia, v. 11, no. 4, p. 40.) Holland, C. H., 1983, Soviet and British stratigraphical classifications compared: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 140, p. 845-847. Holland, C. H., 1986, Does the golden spike still glitter?: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 143, p. 3-21. Holland, C. H., 1989, Synchronology, taxonomy and reality: Royal Soc. London Phil. Trans., series B. no. 325, p. 263-277. Holland, C. H., J. D. Lawson, and V. G. Walmsley, 1963, The Silurian rocks of the Ludlow District, Shropshire: British Museum (Natural History) Bull., Geology, v. 8, no. 3, p. 95-171. Holmes, A. 1947, The construction of a geological time-scale: Geol. Soc. Glasgow Trans., v. 21, p. 117-152. Holmes, A., 1960, A revised geological time-scale: Edinburgh Geol. Soc. Trans, v. 17, pt. 3, p. 183-216. Holmes, A., 1963, Introduction: in The Precambrian: Vol. 1 of The geologic systems (K. Rankama, ed.): Interscience Publishers, New York, p. xi-xxiv. Homibrook, N. de B., 1965, A viewpoint on stages and zones: New Zealand Jour. Geol.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 171

Geophys., v. 8, no. 6, p. 1195-1212. Hornibrook, N. de B., 1971, Inherent instability of biostratigraphic zonal schemes: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 14, no. 4, p. 727-733. Horusitzky, F., 1955, On the problems of geochronology: Foldtani Kozlony, v. 85, p. 106-121. House, M. R., 1985, A new approach to an absolute timescale from measurements of or­ bital cycles and sedimentary microrhythms: Nature, v. 316, no. 6022, p. 721-725. Hsieh Hsien-ming, 1959, Some considerations in connection with geochronologic and stratigraphic units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 8, p. 381. Hu Shi-zhong, 1987, The method of thinking on defining stratigraphic terms (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 33, no. 1, p. 91-94. Huang, Ben-hong, 1959, Some considerations regarding geochronologic and stratigraphic units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 10, p. 482-483. Huang, Ben-hong, 1960, On the terms “series” used in stratigraphic units and “epoch” used in geochronologic units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 20, no. 3, p. 141-142. Hughes, N. F., 1964, Stages and boundaries in stratigraphy: in Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1962), Volume des Comptes Rendus et Memoires publies par l’Institut grand-ducal, Section des Sciences naturelles, physiques, et mathematiques, p. 30. Hughes, N. F., 1974, Beneficial regulation of procedure in editing stratigraphy: Lethaia, v. 7, no. 4, p. 283-286. Hughes, N. F., 1989, Fossils as information: Cambridge Univ. Press, 136 p. Hughes, N. F., et al., 1967, A use of reference-points in stratigraphy: Geol. Mag., v. 104, no. 6, p. 634-635, (Comments by P. C. Sylvester-Bradley and reply: Geol. Mag., v. 105, no. 1, p. 78-79; comments by P. E. Kent and reply: p. 80, 1968.) Hupe, P., 1960, Les zones stratigraphiques: BRGM France, Serv. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., no. 49, p. 1-20. (Discussion by H. D. Hedberg: BRGM France, Serv. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., no. 54, p. 6-11, 1962). Huxley, T., 1862, The anniversary address: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 18, p. xl-liv. Indiana Geological Survey, Geological Names Committee (R. H. Shaver, Chairman), 1962, Note 28 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)— Application to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature for an amendment of article 4f of the Code of Strati­ graphic Nomenclature on informal status of named aquifers, oil , coal beds, and quarry layers: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 46, no. 10, p. 1935. Indiana Geological Survey, Geological Names Committee (R. H. Shaver, Chairman), 1963, Discussion of the Stratigraphic Code: Beacon or gospel?: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 47, no. 5, p. 850-851. Ingle, J. C., 1973, Summary comments on Neogene biostratigraphy, physical stratigra­ phy, and paleo-oceanography in the marginal northeastern Pacific Ocean: Initial re­ ports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 18, p. 949-960. International Geological Congress (Paris, 1878), 1880, C. R., 313 p. (see particularly p. 60-142.) International Geological Congress (Bologna, 1881), 1882, C. R., 657 p. (see particularly p. 89-126, 196-197, 429-658.) International Geological Congress (Berlin, 1885), 1888, C. R., 546 p. (see p. lxxiv-cxiv, 279-530.) International Geological Congress (London, 1888), 1891, C. R., 472 p. (see Appendices A, B, and C.) International Geological Congress (St. Petersburg, 1897), 1899, C. R., 464 p. (see p. cxlii—cli, 1-52.)

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 172 Bibliography

International Geological Congress (Paris, 1900), 1901, C. R., v. 1, 637 p. (see p. 152-160, 192-203.) International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Terminology (ISST), 1961, Report 1— Statement of principles of stratigraphic classification and terminology: 21st Int. Geol. Cong. (Norden, 1960) Proc., Part 25, 38 p. (Italian translation, 1963, Riv. Ital. Pal. Strat., v. 69, no. 3, p. 429^*55.) International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Terminology (ISST), 1964, Report 2— Definition o f geologic systems: 22nd Int. Geol. Cong. (India) Proc., Part 18, 26 p. (Reprinted in large part in Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 49, no. 10, p. 1694-1703, 1965.) International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1970, Report 3— Preliminary report on lithostratigraphic units: 24th Int. Geol. Congress (Montreal, 1970), 30 p. International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1970, Report 4— Preliminary report on stratotypes: 24th Int. Geol. Congress (Montreal, 1970), 39 p. International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1971, Report 5— Preliminary report on biostratigraphic units: 24th Int. Geol. Congress (Montreal, 1970), 50 p. International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1971, Report 6— Preliminary report on chronostratigraphic units: 24th Int. Geol. Congress (Montreal, 1970), 39 p. International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1972, Report 7— (a) Introduction to an International Guide to Stratigraphic Classification, Terminology, and Usage; (b) Summary of an International Guide to Stratigraphic Classification, Terminology, and Usage; Lethaia, 1972, v. 5, no. 3, p. 283-323; Boreas, 1972, v. 1, no. 3, p. 199-239 (Spanish translation by C. Petzall, 1973, Bol. Geologt'a [Venezuela], v. 11, no. 22, p. 287-331). International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1976, International Stratigraphic Guide— A guide to stratigraphic classification, terminology, and proce­ dure (H. D. Hedberg, ed.): John Wiley and Sons, New York, 200 p. International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1987a, Unconformity-bounded stratigraphic units: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 98, no. 2, p. 232-237. (Discussion by J. G. Johnson: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 99, no. 3, p. 443, 1987; Reply: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 99, no. 3, p. 444, 1987.) (Discussion by M. A. Murphy: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 100, no. 1, p. 155, 1988: Reply: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 100, no. 1, p. 156, 1988.) International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), 1987b, Stratigraphic classification and nomenclature of igneous and metamorphic rock bodies: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 99, no. 3, p. 440-442. (Discussion by P. C. Bateman: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 100, no. 6, p. 995-996, 1988; Reply: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 100, no. 6, p. 996-997, 1988.) (Discussion by K. Laajoki: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 101, no. 5, p. 753-754, 1989; Reply: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 101, no. 5, p. 754, 1989.) International Subcommission on Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), and Subcommission on a Magnetic Polarity Time Scale, 1979, Magnetostratigraphic polarity units—A supplementary chapter of the ISSC International Stratigraphic Guide: Geology, v. 7, no. 12, p. 578-583. Irvine, T. N., 1982, Terminology for layered intrusions: Jour. , v. 23, no. 3, p. 127-162.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 173

Irving, E., 1971, Nomenclature in magnetic stratigraphy: Royal Astron. Soc., Geophys. Jour., v. 24, no. 5, p. 529-531. Irving, E., 1972, Paleomagnetic stratigraphy: names or numbers?: Comments, Earth Sci.: Geophysics, v. 2, no. 4, p. 125-130. Irving, E., 1974, Dissent magnetic— letter to editor: Geotimes, v. 19, no. 4, p. 14. Ivanova, E. A., 1955, On the question of connection of stages of evolution of organic world with the stages of evolution of the Earth’s crust (in Russian): Dokladi USSR Acad. Sci., v. 105, no. 1, p. 154-157. Jaanuson, V., 1960, The Viruan (Middle Ordovician) of Oland: Uppsala Univ. Geol. Inst. Bull., v. 38, p. 207-288. Jaeger, H., 1981, Trends in stratigraphischer Methodik und Terminologie: Zeitschr. geol. Wiss., v. 9, no. 3, p. 309-332. James, H. L., 1960, Problems of stratigraphy and correlation of Precambrian rocks with particular reference to the Lake Superior region: Am. Jour. Sci. (Bradley volume), v. 258-A, p. 104-114. James, H. L., 1972, Note 40 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)—Subdivision of Precambrian: An interim scheme to be used by U.S. Geological Survey: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 56, no. 6, p. 1128-1133. (Discussion by M. J. Frarey and W. F. Fahrig and reply by H. L. James: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 56, no. 10, p. 2083-2086.) James, H. L., 1981, Reflections on problems of time subdivision and correlation: Precambrian Research, v. 15, nos. 3-4, p. 191-198. Jaworowski, K., 1964, Przestrzenna koncepcja facji i niektore terminy facjalne: Przegl. Geol., no. 11, p. 461-463. Jeletzky, J. A., 1956, Paleontology, basis of practical geochronology: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 4, p. 679-706. (Discussion by R. M. Stainforth: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 9, p. 2289-2290, 1956.) Jeletzky, J. A., 1965, Is it possible to quantify biochronological correlation?: Jour. Paleontology, v. 39, no. 1, p. 135-140. Jenkins, D. G., 1966, Standard Cenozoic stratigraphic zonal scheme: Nature, v. 211, no. 5045, p. 178. Jenkins, D. G., 1971, The reliability of some Cenozoic planktonic foraminiferal “datum- planes” used in biostratigraphic correlation: Jour. Foraminiferal Research, v. 1, no. 2, p. 82-86. Jepsen, G. L., 1940, faunas of the Polecat Bench Formation, Park County, Wyoming, Part 1: Am. Phil. Soc. Proc., v. 83, no. 2, p. 217-340. (see p. 219-243.) Jewett, J. M., 1962, The concept of time in stratigraphic classification: Kansas Acad. Sci. Trans., v. 65, no. 2, p. 97-109. Johnson, J. G., 1979, Intent and reality in biostratigraphic zonation: Jour. Paleontology, v. 53, no. 4, p. 931-942. Johnson, J. G., 1981, Chronozones and other misapplications of chronostratigraphic con­ cepts: Lethaia, v. 14, no. 4, p. 285-286. Johnson, J. G., 1992, Belief and reality in biostratigraphic zonation: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 26, no. 1, p. 41-48. Johnson, J. G., and W. W. Niebuhr II, 1976, Anatomy of an assemblage zone: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 87, no. 12, p. 1693-1703. Johnson, M. R. (ed.), 1987, Guidelines for standardised lithostratigraphic descriptions (by the South African Committee for Stratigraphy): Geological Survey of South Africa Circular 1, 18 p.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 174 Bibliography

Johnson, M. R., and I. C. Rust, 1988, Terrenes, and unconformity- bounded units: a review of current nomenclature: South African Jour, of Geology, v. 91, no. 4, p. 522-526. (Discussion by H. de la R. Winter and C. S. Kingsley: South African Jour, of G eology, v. 92, no. 3, p. 295-298, 1989.) Jukes-Browne, A. J., 1899, Zones and “chronological” maps: Geol. Mag., new ser., decade 4, v. 6, no. 5, p. 216-219. Jukes-Browne, A. J., 1903, The term “Hermera”: Geol. Mag., new ser., decade 4, v. 10, no. 1, p. 36-38. Jukes-Browne, A. J., 1912, The student’s handbook of stratigraphical geology (2nd ed.): Edward Stanford, London, 668 p. Kaemmel, T., 1966, Das Aquivalent der Biozone in der Radiogeochronologie—der Vertrauensbereich: Geologie (Berlin), Jahrg. 15, H. 8, p. 989-992 (English and Russian abstract). Kagarmanov, A. Kh., 1986, Horizon as a provincial stratigraphic unit (in Russian): Memoirs of Leningrad Institute, vol. 107, p. 3-10. Kahler, F., 1955, Stratigraphische Begriffe: Verh. Geol. Bundesanst, Wien, p. 242-246. Karogodin, Yu. N., 1980, Principles of cyclicity (rhythmicity) in stratigraphy (in Rus­ sian): in Debatable problems of lithostratigraphy, Novosibirsk, p. 79-91. Karogodin, Yu. N., 1985, Regional stratigraphy: systematic aspects (in Russian): “Nedra,” M oscow, 179 p. Karogodin, Yu. N., 1986, Lithostratigraphic supplement of Stratigraphic Code of the USSR (in Russian): Inst, of Geology and Geophysics, Novosibirsk, Preprint no. 10, 40 p. Karogodin, Yu. N., and Yu. P. Smirnov, 1977, On the significance of stratotypes and ref­ erence sections of cyclic stratigraphic units (cyclostratons) (in Russian): in Theoret. and method, problems of sedimentation cyclicity, Novosibirsk, p. 124-135. Kauffman, E. G., 1970, Population systematics, radiometrics and zonation— a new bio­ stratigraphy: in North Am. Paleont. Convention (Chicago, 1969) Proc., Part F (Correlations by fossils), p. 612-666. Kauffman, E. G., 1977, Evolutionary rates and biostratigraphy: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 109-141. Kauffman, E. G., 1988, Concepts and methods of high-resolution event stratigraphy: Annual Review Earth and Planetary Sci., v. 16, p. 605-654. Kauffman, E. G., and J. E. Hazel (eds.), 1977, Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy: Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., 658 p. (Review by A. Martinsson, Lethaia, v. 12, no. 4, p. 296, 1979.) Kauter, K., F. Stammberger, and G. Tischendorf, 1968, Vergleichende Tabelle der letz- ten veroffentlichten geochronologischen Zeitskalen der phanerozoischen Epochen: IUGS Kommission fur Geochronologie. Zeitschr. Angew. Geol., Bd. 14, H. 8, p . 440^142. Kay, M., 1947, Analysis of stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 31, no. 1, p. 162-168. Kay, M., 1956, Precambrian and Protozoic: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 7, p. 1722-1723. Kegel, W., 1937, liber Richtprofile: Deutsche Geol. Ges. Zeitschr., Bd. 90, H. 4, p. 224-226. Keller, B. M., 1950, Stratigraphic subdivisions (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 6, p. 3-25.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 175

Keller, B. M., 1964, Principles of establishment and subdivision of the Upper Pre-Cam­ brian (in Russian): in Stratigraphy of the USSR, v. 2, p. 578-586, Moscow. Keller, B. M., 1973, The and its place in the single stratigraphic scale of the Precambrian (in Russian): Sov. Geol. no. 6, p. 3-17. (English translation in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 16, no. 6, 1974, p. 714—726.) Keller, B. M„ 1980a, Principles and methods of constructing a geochronologic scale (in Russian): in Summary accounts of science and technology, VINITI, Gen. geol., no. 11, p. 18-27. Keller, B. M., 1980b, Stratigraphic units of the Precambrian (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem, “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 116-124. Keller, G., 1957, Fortschritte in der Methodik und Ergebnisse geologischer Zeitrechnung: Naturwiss. Rundschau (Stuttgart), Jahrg. 10, H. 5, p. 169-172. Kennett, J. P. (ed.), 1980, Magnetic stratigraphy of sediments: Scientific and Academic Editions, Papers in Geology, v. 54, 448 p. Keyes, C. R., 1923a, Contraposed criteria of geological classification: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 39, no. 1, p. 51-54. Keyes, C. R., 1923b, Uniformity in geological classification: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 39, no. 3, p. 239-246. Keyes, C. R., 1923c, Taxonomy of periods in geology: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 40, no. 2, p. 151-156. Keyes, C. R., 1924, Stratigraphical geology—Global concurrence of geological periods of time: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 41, no. 4, p. 317-320. Keyes, C. R., 1927, Standardization of geological terminology: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 48, no. 3, p. 213-217. Keyes, C. R., 1931a, Continental stratigraphy in third dimension: Pan-Am. Geol. v. 56, no. 1, p. 27-46. Keyes, C. R., 1931b, Diastatic framework of our geological chronology: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 56, no. 2, p. 85-115. Keyes, C. R., 1934, Practicability in geological nomenclature: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 61, no. 3, p. 231-234. Keyes, C. R., 1935a, Stratigraphic disuse of group rank: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 63, no. 1, p. 73-76. Keyes, C. R., 1935b, Priority vs. usage in geological terminology: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 64, no. 2, p. 141-144. Keyes, C. R., 1936, Diastatic measure of biotic chronology: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 66, no. 5, p. 363-376. Keyes, C. R., 1937a, Homotaxial principle in geological classification: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 67, no. 3, p. 215-230. Keyes, C. R., 1937b, Absolute scale of geological ages: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 67, no. 3, p. 231-234. Khalfin, L. L„ 1955, On some problems of regional stratigraphy (in Russian): Materialy Novosibirskoi konferencii po ucheniiu o geologicheskih faciiah, Novosibirsk, v. 1, p. 45-55. Khalfin, L. L., 1960, Principle of biostratigraphic parallelization (in Russian): Trudy SNIGGIMS, no. 8, p. 5-26. Khalfin, L. L., 1967, The rule of subsequent bedding (The Steno-Hutton Rule) (in Russian): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 57, p. 5-29. Khalfin, L. L., 1969, The principle of Nikitin-Chemyshev—the theoretical basis of strati­ graphic classification (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.),

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 176 Bibliography

Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 7—42. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, o f Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 3-34.) Khalfin, L. L., 1970, The A. P. Karpinskij principle and the unit boundaries of the International Stratigraphic Time Scale (in Russian): in Materialy po regional’noy geologii Sibiri: Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 110, p. 4-10. Khalfin, L. L., 1973, On the methodological bases of stratigraphic classification (in Russian): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 169, p. 3-21. Khalfin, L. L., 1980a, Suite (data for analyzing the notion) (in Russian): Trudy, SNIG­ GIMS, no. 260, p. 5-18. Khalfin, L. L., 1980b, Theoretical problems of stratigraphy (in Russian): “Nauka,” Novo­ sibirsk, 200 p. Khramov, A. N., 1958, and stratigraphic correlation. Published in Rus­ sian by Gostoptechizdat; English translation by A. J. Loikine, Canberra, Australia, 178 p. (1960). Kitts, D. B., 1966, Geologic time: Jour. Geol., v. 74, no. 2, p. 127-146. Kitts, D. B., 1989, Geological time and psychological time: Earth Sciences History, v. 8, no. 2, p. 190-191. Kleinpell, R. M., 1938, Miocene stratigraphy of California: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., Tulsa, Oklahoma, 450 p. (see particularly p. 87-99.) Kleinpell, R. M. (reported by J. S. Brown), 1960, Principles of biostratigraphy: Alberta Soc. Petroleum Geol. Jour., v. 8, no. 4, p. 136-137. Kobayashi, T., 1944-1945, Concept of time in geology, Pt. 1, 1944, On the major clas­ sification of the geological age: Imp. Acad. Tokyo Proc., v. 20, no. 7, p. 475—478. Pt 2, 1944, The length of the Sinian time estimated by the stratigraphical method: Ibid, v. 20, no. 7, p.479—498. Pt. 3, 1944, An instant in the Phanerozoic Eon and its bearing on geology and biology: Ibid, v. 20, no. 10, p. 742-750. Pt. 4, 1945, An explanation of the relation between mutation and saltation together with an advice to the uniformitarian: Ibid, v. 21, no. 1, p. 70-73. Pt. 5, 1945, Time scale of the Diluvium and relation among various kinds of time in historical sciences: Ibid, v. 21, p. 74-77. Koenig, J. W., 1961, Stratigraphic principles and policy: in The stratigraphic succession in Missouri (W. B. Howe and J. W. Koenig, eds.): State of Missouri, Geological Survey and Water Resources, 2nd ser., v. 40, Rolla, Missouri, 185 p. (see p. 137-158.) Kolbel, H., 1963, Internationale Beschlusse zur stratigraphischen Gliederung und Nomenklatur des Jura-Systems: Deutsche Geol. Ges. Ber., v. 8, no. 4, p. 390-394. Kopek, G., E. Dudich, Jr., and T. Kecskemeti, 1971a, Le probleme de coupes-reperes, probleme central des recherches stratigraphiques: Hung. Magy. Allami Foldt. Intez., Evk., v. 54, no. 4, pt. 1, p. 347-357 (with discussion). Kopek, G., E. Dudich, Jr., and T. Kecskemeti, 1971b, Opornyy razrez kak osnovnoy vo- pros stratigraficheskikh issledovaniy (Type section as basic problem in stratigraphic studies): Hung. Magy. Allami Foldt. Intez., Evk., v. 54 (1969), no. 4, pt. 4, p. 119-123. Kosanke, R. M., et al., 1960, Classification of the strata of Illinois: Illinois State Geol. Survey Report of Investigations 214, 84 p. Koshelkina, Z. V., 1974, The relationship of zonal scales, the zone and its place in the stratigraphic scale (in Russian): Trudy, Sev.-Vost. Kompleks. Inst., USSR Acad. Sci., vyp. 63, p. 11-18.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 111

Kosygin, Yu. A., Yu. S. Salin, and V. A. Solovyev (eds.), 1974, Stratigraphy and mathe­ matics (in Russian): Inst. Tektoniki i Geofiziki, Khabarovsk, 207 p. Kosygin, Yu. A., Yu. S. Salin, and V. A. Solovyev, 1975, Classical, rational and con­ structive stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. Kazakhstan Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 5, p. 83-85. Kosygin, Yu. A., and Yu. S. Salin, 1979, Stratigraphy and geological time (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 11, p. 7-18. Kosygin, Yu. A., et al. (eds.), 1979, General stratigraphy— Handbook of terminology (in Russian): Khabarovsk, 441 p. Kottlowski, F. E., 1958, Formation or formation— Discussion of Report 4 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)—Nature, Usage and Nomenclature of Rock Units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 4, p. 893-894. Kovalevsky, O. P., 1969, The boundaries of geologic systems (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 131-137 (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratig­ raphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 116-121). Kovalevsky, O. P., 1971, Analysis of main criticisms of rules of stratigraphic classifica­ tion and terminology (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 2, p. 43-55. (English translation in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 14, no. 3, 1972, p. 205-213.) Kovalevsky, O. P., 1980, Results of discussing the Project Stratigraphic Code of the USSR (in Russian): in Stratigraphic Classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 11-32. Kovalevsky, O. P., 1984, Foreign stratigraphic codes (in Russian): in Express— informa­ tion. General and regional geology, geological mapping, vyp. 2, p. 1-25. Kovalevsky, O. P., 1986, New stratigraphic code of North America (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 4, p. 130-135. Krasheninnikov, V. A., 1969, Geographic and stratigraphic distribution of planktonic foraminifera in Paleogene deposits in tropical and subtropical regions (in Russian): Trudy, Geol. Inst. USSR Acad. Sci., vyp. 202, 202 p. Krasnov, I. I., 1961, Recent state and further tasks of mapping and working out of strati­ graphic nomenclature of the Quaternary deposits in the USSR (in Russian): in Materialy Vsesoiuznogo sovescania po izucheniiu chetvertichnogo perioda, Moscow, v. 1, p. 89-98. Krasnov, 1.1., 1971, Problems of the study of stratigraphic units for detailed subdivision of the Anthropogene (in Russian): in Problemy periodizatsii pleistotsena. Mat. Sim- poziuma, Leningrad. Krasnov, I. I., and K. V. Nikiforova, 1973, A stratigraphic scheme for the Quaternary (Anthropogene) System, refined on the basis of materials obtained in recent years (in Russian): in Stratigrafiya, Paleogeografiya i Litogenez Antropogena Evrazii, Geol. Inst. USSR Acad. Sci., p. 157-188. Krasnov, V. I., 1980, The problem of lithostratigraphic units and their place in strati­ graphic classification (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem, “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 135-146. Krasnov, V. I., 1986, Terminology, rules and practice of establishing regional and local lithostratigraphic units (in Russian): in Regional and local stratigraphic units for the purpose of large-scale geological mapping of Siberia, Novosibirsk, p. 5-16. Krasnov, V. I., and A. P. Shcheglov, 1969, Classification of rocks according to the tec­ tonic conditions of their formation (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 121-130. (English translation by Israel

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 178 Bibliography

Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, o f Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 107-115). Krassilov, V. A., 1974, Causal biostratigraphy: Lethaia, v. 7, no. 3, p. 173-179. Krassilov, V. A., 1977, Evolution and biostratigraphy (in Russian): “Nauka,” Moscow, 256 p. Krassilov, V. A., 1978, Organic evolution and natural stratigraphical classification: Lethaia, v. 11, no. 2, p. 93-104. Krishtofovich, A. N., 1939, The new system of regional stratigraphy (in Russian): Sov. Geol., v. 9, no. 9, p. 68-76. Krishtofovich, A. N., 1946, Uniformity in geological terminology and a new system of regional stratigraphy (in Russian): Paleontologicheskiy Sbornik, no. 4, p. 46-76. Krumbein, W. C., 1951, Some relations among sedimentation, stratigraphy, and seismic exploration: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 35, no. 7, p. 1505-1522. Krumbein, W. C., and L. L. Sloss, 1951, Stratigraphy and sedimentation: W. H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, 497 p. Krumbein, W. C., and L. L. Sloss, 1963, Stratigraphy and Sedimentation (2nd. edition): W. H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, 660 p. Krut, I. V., 1974a, On the construction of a stratigraphic theory (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 7, p. 38^49. Krut, I. V., 1974b, On the construction of a stratigraphic theory— paleobiogeocoenotic organization and stratigraphic subdivisions (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 8, p. 26-37. Krutzsch, W., and D. Lotsch, 1964, Contribution a la question de la subdivision du Tertiaire en deux systemes independants: Le Palogene et le “Neogene”: Colloque sur le Paleogene (Bordeaux, 1962), BRGM France, Mem. 28, p. 931-936. Krymgol'ts, G. Ya., 1964, On the importance of some concepts in stratigraphy (in Russian): Trudy, VSEGEI, nov. ser., v. 102, p. 20-24. Krymgol'ts, G. Ya., 1968, Some criteria for the establishment of stratigraphic boundaries (in Russian): Vestn. LGU, no. 24, Geol. Geogr., no. 4, p. 175-176. Krymgol'ts, G. Ya., 1980, Zone, Iona etc. (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 146-153. Kulp, J. L., 1960a, Absolute age determination of sedimentary rocks: Fifth World Petro­ leum Cong. (New York, 1959) Proc., Section 1, p. 689-704. Kulp, J. L., 1960b, The geological time scale: 21st Int. Geol. Congress (Norden, 1960), Report, pt. 3, p. 18-27. Kulp, J. L., (ed.), 1961a, Geochronology of rock systems: New York Acad. Sci., Ann., v. 91, Art. 2, p. 159-594. (A series of 57 papers by various authors resulting from a conference on geochronology of rock systems held by the New York Acad, of Sciences, March 3-5, 1960.) Kulp, J. L., 1961b, Geologic time scale: Science, v. 133, no. 3459, p. 1105-1114. Kutscher, F., 1960, Stratigraphische Tagesfragen: Notizbl. Hess. Landesamt Boden- forsch. Wiesbaden, v. 88, p. 107-121. Laffite, R., 1972, La notion stratigraphique d'etage: in Colloque sur les methodes et ten­ dances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, P- 17-25. Laffite, R., et al., 1972a, Some international agreement on essentials of stratigraphy: Geol. Mag., v. 109, no. 1, p. 1-15. Laffite, R., et al., 1972b, Internationale Ubereinkunft iiber die Grundlagen der Strati­ graphie: Akad. Wiss. und Lit., Math-Naturwiss. Klasse, Abh., no. 1, 24 p. Laffite, R., et al., 1972c, Essai d’accord international sur les problemes essentiels de la stratigraphie: Soc. Geol. France, C. R. Sommaire, fasc. 13, p. 36^15.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 179

Lane, A. C., 1906, The geologic : Jour. Geol., v. 14, no. 5, p. 425^129. Lapparent, A. de, 1885, Traite de Geologie: Savy, Paris, 1504 p. (see p. 698-712: Principes de la classification des formations sedimentaires.) Lapworth, C., 1879, On the tripartite classification of the Lower Paleozoic rocks: Geol. Mag., n.s., v. 6, p. 1-15. Larson, R. L., and W. C. Pitman III, 1972, Worldwide correlation of Mesozoic magnetic anomalies, and its implication: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 83, no. 12, p. 3645-3662. Larson, R. L., and T. W. C. Hilde, 1975, A revised time scale of magnetic reversals for the and : Jour. Geophys. Res., v. 80, no. 17, p. 2586-2594. Lawson, J. D., 1962, Stratigraphical boundaries: Symposiums—Band, Silur/Devon- Grenze (Stuttgart, 1960), p. 136-142. Lawson, J. D., 1971a, The Silurian-Devonian boundary—Letter to Editor: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 127, pt. 6, p. 629-630. Lawson, J. D., 1971b, Stratigraphic principles and the Silurian-Devonian boundary (in Russian with English abstract): Mezhdunar. Simp. Granitsa Silura Devona, Biostrat. Silura, Nizhego Srednego Devona, Trudy, no. 3, v. 1, p. 135-144. Lawson, J. D., 1979a, Stability of stratigraphic nomenclature: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 7, no. 3, p. 159-165. Lawson, J. D., 1979b, Fossils and lithostratigraphy: Lethaia, v. 12, no. 2, p. 189-191. Lawson, J. D., 1981, Stability of stratigraphic nomenclature—Answers to a question­ naire: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 10, no. 1, p. 45-51. Lecompte, M., 1960, L’argument paleontologique en stratigraphie, quelques exemples critiques en Ardenne et dans l'Eifel: 21st Int. Geol. Congress (Norden, 1960) Report, pt. 21, p. 261-263. Lecompte, M., 1961, Facies marins et stratigraphie dans le Devonien de TArdenne: Soc. Geol. Belgique Ann., t. 85, Bull. 1, p. B17-B57. Le Conte, J., et al., 1898, A symposium on the classification and nomenclature of geo­ logic time-divisions: Jour. Geol., v. 6, no. 4, p. 333-355. Legrand, P., 1964, Considerations sur 1'evolution de quelques concepts de stratigraphie (Application a l'exploration d’un nouveau bassin sedimentaire): BRGM France, Dept. Inform. Geol. Bull Trimest., 16th year, no. 62, p. 1-8. Lehmann, J. G., 1756, Versuch einer Geschichte von Flotz-Gebiirgen, betreffend deren Entstehung, Lage, etc., Berlin, 76 p. Leighton, M. M., 1958, Principles and viewpoints in formulating the stratigraphic classi­ fication of the Pleistocene: Jour. Geol., v. 66, no. 6, p. 700-709. Lemon, R. R., 1990, Principles of stratigraphy: Merrill, Columbus, Ohio, 559 p. Leonov, G. P., 1953, On the question of principle and criteria of regional-stratigraphic subdivision of the sedimentary formations (in Russian): in Pamiati professora A. N. Mazarovicha, Moscow, p. 31-57. Leonov, G. P., 1955, On the question of correlation of stratigraphic and geochronological subdivisions (in Russian): Vestnik MGU, ser. geol., no. 8, p. 17-31. Leonov, G. P., 1973-1974, Principles of stratigraphy (in Russian), vol. 1, 530 p.; vol. 2, 486 p., MGU. Leonov, G. P., V. P. Alimarina, and D. P. Naidin, 1965, On principle and methods of es­ tablishment of stage subdivisions of standard scale (in Russian): Vest. MGU, ser. geol., no. 4, p. 15-28. Levin, B. S., 1980, On the concepts of stratigraphic scales: a common dualistic and a multiple one (in Russian): in Ecosystems in stratigraphy, Vladivostok, p. 73-77.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 180 Bibliography

Librovich, L. S., 1948, Sur la methode paleontologique en stratigraphie: Mat. VSEGEI, Paleon. i Strat., Sbornik 5. (French translation by Mme. Jayet, S.I.G., Paris.) Librovich, L. S., and N. K. Ovechkin, 1963, Problems and rules for the study and de­ scription of stratotypes and stratigraphic reference cross sections (in Russian): Inter­ departmental Strat. Comm, o f the USSR, VSEGEI (English translation in Int. Geol. Review, v. 7, no. 7, p. 1141-1150). Lloyd, A. J., 1964, The Luxembourg Colloquium and the revision of the stages of the Jurassic System: Geol. Mag., v. 101, no. 3, p. 249-259 (Comments by T. G. Miller and D. V. Ager: Geol. Mag. v. 101, no. 5, p. 469^472, 1964: reply by A. J. Lloyd: Geol. Mag., v. 102, no. 1, P- 88, 1965). Longwell, C. R. (ed.), 1949, Sedimentary facies in geologic history: Geol. Soc. America Memoir 39, 171 p. Lowman, S. W., 1949, Discussion: in Sedimentary facies in geologic history (C. R. Longwell, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Mem. 39, p. 145-151. Lucas, J., and M. Bonhomme, 1972, Stratigraphie et geochronologie. Rapport sur les methodes geochronologiques appliquees a la stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les meth- odes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 936-941. Liittig, G., 1960, Vorschlage fiir eine geochronologische Gliederung des Holozans in : Eiszeitalter und Gegenwart, Bd. 11, p. 51-63. Liittig, G., 1964, Prinzipielles zur Quartar-Stratigraphie: Geol. Jahrb., v. 82, p. 177-202. Liittig, G., 1967, Schleswig als Standardregion fiir die Internationale Holozan-Strati- graphie: in Frtihe Menschheit und Umwelt, Teil II, p. 252-260. Liittig, 1968, Ansichten, Bestrebungen und Beschliisse der Subkommission fiir Europaische Quartarstratigraphie der INQUA: Eiszeitalter und Gegenwart, Bd. 19, p. 283-288. Liittig, G., 1970, Sprachlich-nomenklatorische Anregungen zur Unterscheidung von deutschsprachlichen Begriffen der Litho- und Ortho-Stratigraphie: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 1, no. 1, p. 53-58. Lyell, C., 1830-1833, Principles of geology, 3 vols., Murray, London, vol. 1 (1830) 511 p., vol. 2 (1832) 330 p., vol. 3 (1833) 109 p. Lyell, C., 1837, Principles of geology: Kay, Philadelphia, 2 vols., 1st American ed. (see particularly v. 2, p. 186-513.) Lyell, C., 1838, Elements of geology: Murray, London, 543 p. Lyell, C., 1839, Elements of geology: French translation, Pitois Levrault, Paris, appendix, p. 616-621. McGillavry, H. J., 1952, Wat is Stratigraphie: Rede uitgesproken bij de aanvaarding van het Ambt van Gewoon Floogleraar aan de Universiteit van Amsterdam, Amsterdam, 16 p. Macqueen, R. W., and S. S. Oriel, 1977, Note 47 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)— Application for amendment of Articles 27 and 34 of Stratigraphic Code to introduce point-boundary stratotype concept: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 61, no. 7, p. 1083-1085. Makedonov, A. V., 1968, Principles and methods of regional stratigraphy of coal basins, correlation of sections and synonymy of coal beds (in Russian): in Metody korrelyat- sii uglenosnykh tolshch i sinonimika ugol’nykh plastov, “Nauka,” p. 10-50. Makridin, V. P., and M. S. Mesezhnikov, 1987, Paleobiogeographic zonation and its sig­ nificance for biostratigraphy (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 1, p. 59-65. Mallory, V. S., 1970, Biostratigraphy— a major basis for paleontologic correlation: in

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 181

North Am. Paleontol. Conv. (Chicago, 1969), Proc., pt. F (Correlation by fossils), p. 553-566. Mamet, B., 1972, Quelques aspects de l’analyse sequentielle: in Colloque sur les meth­ odes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 663-677. Mann, C. J., 1970, Isochronous, synchronous, and coetaneous: Jour. Geol., v. 78, p. 749-752. Marcou, J., 1897a, Rules and misrules in stratigraphic classification: Am. Geol., v. 19, no. 1, p. 35-49. Marcou, J., 1897b, Rules and misrules in stratigraphic classification: Am. Geol., v. 19, no. 2, p. 111-131. Markov, K. K., 1962, The main stratigraphic boundaries of the Quaternary System (in Russian): Trudi Komissi po izucheniiu chetvertichnogo perioda, USSR Acad. Sci., v. 20, p. 140-142. Marr, J. E., 1898, The principles of stratigraphic geology: Cambridge Univ. Press, 304 p. (2nd ed., 1905). Martinsson, A., 1973a, Editor's column: Stratotypes: Lethaia, v. 6, no. 1, p. 101-102. Martinsson, A., 1973b, Editor’s column: Ecostratigraphy: Lethaia, v. 6, no. 4, p. 441^143. Martinsson, A., (ed.), 1977, The Silurian-Devonian boundary: IUGS Series A, no. 5, E. Schweizerbart’sche Verlagsbuchhandlung, Stuttgart, 349 p. Maubeuge, P. L., 1959, Les methodes modernes de la stratigraphie du Jurassique; ses buts, ses problemes: Soc. Belg. Geol. Bull., v. 68, fasc. 1, p. 59-103. Maxey, G. B., 1964, Hydrostratigraphic units: Jour. Hydrology, v. 2, p. 124-129. McCammon, R. B., 1970, On estimating the relative biostratigraphic value of fossils: Univ. of Uppsala Geol. Inst. Bull., new ser., v. 2, no. 6, p. 49-57. McElhinny, M. W., 1978, The magnetic polarity time scale: prospects and possibilities in : in Contributions to the geologic time scale (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner, and H. D. Hedberg, eds.), Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 57-65. McElhinny, M. W., and P. J. Burek, 1971, Mesozoic palaeomagnetic stratigraphy: Na­ ture, v. 232, no. 5306, p. 98-102. McGowran, B., 1986, Beyond classical biostratigraphy: Petroleum Exploration Soc. Australia Jour., v. 9, p. 28—41. McKee, E. D., 1949, Facies changes in the : in Sedimentary facies in geologic history (C. R. Longwell, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Mem. 39, p. 35—48. McKee, E. D., and C. W. Weir, 1953, Terminology for stratification and cross-stratifica­ tion in sedimentary rocks: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 64, no. 4, p. 381-389. McKerrow, W. S., 1971, Palaeontological prospects—the use of fossils in stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 127, p. 455-464. McLaren, D. J., 1959, The role of fossils in defining rock units with examples from the Devonian of western and arctic Canada: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 734-751. McLaren, D. J., 1969, Report of IUGS Committee on the Silurian-Devonian Boundary and Stratigraphy, August 9, 1968: IUGS Geol. Newsletter, v. 1969, no. 1, p. 24-34. McLaren, D. J., 1970, Presidential address: time, life and boundaries: Jour. Paleontology, v. 44, no. 5, p. 801-815. McLaren, D. J., 1972, Report from the Committee on the Silurian-Devonian Boundary and Stratigraphy to the president of the Commission on Stratigraphy: IUGS Geol. Newsletter, v. 1972, no. 4, p. 268-288. McLaren, D. J., 1977, The Silurian-Devonian Boundary Committee: a final report: in The

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 182 Bibliography

Silurian-Devonian boundary (A. Martinsson, ed.): IUGS Series A, no. 5, E. Schwei- zerbart'sche Verlagsbuchhandlung, p. 1-34. McLaren, D. J., 1978, Dating and correlation, a review: in Contributions to the geologic time scale (G. V. Cohee, M. F. Glaessner, and H. D. Hedberg, eds.), Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 6, p. 1-7. McLean, J. D., 1968, Foraminiferal zones and zone charts— an analysis and a compila­ tion: in Manual of micropaleontological stratigraphy, v. 7: McLean Paleont. Lab., Alexandria, Virginia. Melton, F. A., 1932, Time-equivalent versus lithologic extension of formations: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 16, no. 10, p. 1039-1043. Menner, V. V., 1951, Principles of correlation of multifacial suites (in Russian): Materialy paleontologicheskogo soveshtchaniya po paleozoiu, Moscow, p. 122-138. Menner, V. V., 1962, Biostratigraphic principles of correlation of marine, lagoon and continental suites (in Russian): Trudy, Geol. Inst. USSR Acad. Sci., vyp. 65, 475 p. Menner, V. V., 1971, Geological significance of stratigraphic subdivisions (in Russian): Byul. Mosk. Obshch. Ispyt. Prirody, Otd. Geol., v. 46, no. 2, p. 9-16. (English trans­ lation in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 14, no. 1, 1972, p. 112-117.) Menner, V. V., 1975, The three basic problems in stratigraphy (in Russian): Vestnik MGU, Ser. IV, Geol., no. 6, p. 7-18. Menner, V. V., 1977a, The general scale of stratigraphic subdivisions (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 8-15. Menner, V. V., 1977b, Quaternary System (position in the general scale, lower boundary units) (in Russian): in On the Neogene-Anthropogene boundary: “Nauka i Teknika,” Minsk, p. 7-25. Menner, V. V., 1978, The nature of stratigraphic units (in Russian): in Problems o f stra­ tigraphy and , Moscow, p. 9-20. Menner, V. V., 1979, General scale of stratigraphic categories in the light of recent re­ sults of geologic studies (in Russian): Byul. Mosk. Obshch. Ispyt. Prirody, Otd. Geol., t. 54, vyp. 2, p. 31^48. Menner, V. V., 1980, Zones in the practice of stratigraphic studies (History of establish­ ing, types and nature) (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 3, p. 5-17. Menner, V. V., 1984, Units of international standard stratigraphic scale (present state and prospects): in 27th Int. Geol. Congress (Moscow, 1984), Reports, v. 1, section C.01., M oscow, p. 3-7. Menner, V. V., 1987, Regional stratigraphic scales and units of international geochrono- logical scale (in Russian): in Historical geology: results and prospects, Moscow, p. 11-17. Menner, V. V., 1991, General problems of stratigraphy— selected works (in Russian): “Nauka,” M oscow, 288 p. Menner, V. V., 1992, Regional stratigraphy and paleontological problems— selected works (in Russian): “Nauka,” Moscow, 214 p. Menner, V. V., B. M. Keller, and E. V. Shantser, 1980, The scale of stratigraphic (chronostratigraphic) categories used in geologic practice: 26th Int. Geol. Congress (Paris, 1980), Papers presented by the Soviet geologists, Paleontology, Stratigraphy, Moscow. Menner, V. V., and Yu. B. Gladenkov, 1986, On level of detail of stratigraphic scales (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 5-17. Mesezhnikov, M. S., 1966, Zones of regional stratigraphic systems (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 7, p. 3-16.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 183

Mesezhnikov, M. S„ 1969, Zonal stratigraphy and zoogeography of the sea basins (in Russian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 7, p. 45-53. Mesezhnikov, M. S., and D. L. Stepanov, 1976, Just what is rational stratigraphy (in Russian): in The Idea of Rational Stratigraphy (A. M. Sadykov, ed.): Sov. Geol., no. 7, p. 153-157. Meyen, S. V., 1974a, Controversial questions in the theory of stratigraphy (in Russian): Priroda, no. 12, p. 16-22. Meyen, S. V., 1974b, The concepts “naturalness” and “simultaneousness” in stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 6, p. 79-90. Meyen, S. V., 1980, Ecosystem and principles of interchangeability of features (in Rus­ sian): in Ecosystems in stratigraphy, Vladivostok, p. 16-21. Meyen, S. V., 1981, From general towards theoretical stratigraphy (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 9, p. 58-69. Meyen, S. V., 1985, Structure of theoretical stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 8-16. Meyen, S. V., 1989, Introduction to the theory of stratigraphy (in Russian): “Nauka,” M oscow, 216 p. Middleton, G. V., 1973, Johannes Walther's Law of the correlation of facies: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 84, no. 3, p. 979-987. Miller, F. X., 1977, The graphic correlation method in stratigraphy: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchi­ son & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 165-186. Miller, T. G., 1964, The Luxembourg Colloquium: Geol. Mag., v. 101, no. 5, p. 469^-71. Miller, T. G., 1965, Time in stratigraphy: Paleontology, v. 8, pt. 1, p. 113-131. Mintz, L. W., 1972, Historical geology— the science o f a dynamic earth: Merrill, Colum­ bus, Ohio, 785 p. Mitchum, R. M., Jr., 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 11: Glossary of terms used in seismic stratigraphy: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 205-212. Mitchum, R. M., Jr., and P. R. Vail, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 7: Seismic stratigraphic interpretation procedure: in Seismic stratig­ raphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 135-143. Mitchum, R. M., Jr., P. R. Vail, and J. B. Sangree, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 6: Stratigraphic interpretation of seismic reflection patterns in depositional sequences: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon ex­ ploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 117-133. Mitchum, R. M., Jr., P. R. Vail, and S. Thompson III, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 2: The depositional sequence as a basic unit for stratigraphic analysis: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon explo­ ration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 53-62. Moiseyeva, A. I., 1980, Working-out of stratigraphic nomenclature in the USSR (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Len­ ingrad, p. 76-89. Momper, J. A., 1966, Stratigraphic principles— with some applications to the Permo- Pennsylvanian of the Denver Basin: Wyoming Geol. Assoc., 20th Annual Conf., 1966, p. 90a-90r. Monty, C. L. V., 1967, Pour une codification de la nomenclature stratigraphique Beige: Soc. Geol. Belgique Ann., v. 90, Bull. 3, p. B-203-253.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 184 Bibliography

Monty, C. L. V., 1968, D ’Orbigny's concepts o f stage and zone: Jour. Paleontology, v. 42, no. 3, p. 689-701. Moore, P. F., 1958, Nature, usage and definition of marker-defined vertically segregated rock units: Discussion: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 2, p. 447-450. Moore, R. C., 1933, Historical geology: McGraw Hill, New York, 673 p. Moore, R. C., 1936, Stratigraphic classification of the Pennsylvanian rocks of Kansas: State Geol. Survey of Kansas, Bull. 22, 256 p. (see especially p. 29). Moore, R. C., 1941, Stratigraphy: in Geology, 1888-1938: 50th Anniversary volume, Geol. Soc. America, p. 178-220. Moore, R. C., 1948, Stratigraphical paleontology: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 4, p. 301-326. Moore, R. C., 1949, Meaning of facies: in Sedimentary facies in geologic history (C. R. Longwell, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Mem. 39, p. 1-34. Moore, R. C., 1950, Stratigraphical classification: Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 56, no. 652, p. 39-47. Moore, R. C., 1952a, Orthography as a factor in stability of stratigraphical nomenclature: State Geol. Survey of Kansas, Bull. 96, pt. 9, p. 363-372. Moore, R. C., 1952b, Stratigraphical viewpoints in measurement of geologic time: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 33, no. 2, p. 150-156. Moore, R. C., 1955, Invertebrates and geologic time scale: in Crust o f the Earth (A. Poldervaart, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Special Paper 62, p. 547-573. Moore, R. C., 1957a, Minority report of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen. Report 5—Nature, usage, and nomenclature of biostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1888. Moore, R. C., 1957b, Modern methods of paleoecology: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 8, p. 1775-1801. Morley, L. W., and A. Larochelle, 1964, Paleomagnetism as a means of dating geological events: in Geochronology in Canada (F. F. Osborne, ed.): Royal Soc. Canada Spec. Pub. 8, Univ. Toronto Press, p. 39-51. Morrison, R. B., 1967, Principles of Quaternary soil stratigraphy: in Quaternary Soils (R. B. Morrison and H. E. Wright, Jr. eds.), 7th Cong. INQUA Proc., v. 9, Univ. of Press, p. 1-69. Morrison, R. B., 1968, Means of time-stratigraphic division and long-distance correlation of Quaternary successions: in Means of correlation of Quaternary successions (R. B. Morrison and H. E. Wright, Jr., eds.), 7th Cong. INQUA Proc., v. 8: Univ. of Utah Press, p. 1-113. Morrison, R. B., 1969, The Pleistocene-Holocene boundary: an evaluation, etc.: Geol. en Mijnbouw, v. 48, no. 4, pt. 2, p. 363-371. Morrison, R. B., and H. E. Wright, Jr. (eds.), 1968, Means of correlation of Quaternary successions: 7th Cong. INQUA Proc., Univ. of Utah Press, 631 p. Morton, N. (ed.), 1971, The definition of standard Jurassic stages: Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 83-93. Mu En-zhi, 1954, Stratigraphic terms (in Chinese): Dizhi Zhishi (Geol. Knowledge), no. 4, p. 18-19. Muller, A. H., 1951, Grundlagen der Biostratonomie: Deutsche Akad. Wiss. Berlin (Klasse Math. u. allgemeine Naturwiss.) Abh., Jahrg. 1950, no. 3, p. 1-147. Muller, S. W., 1941, Standard of the Jurassic System: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 52, no. 9, p. 1427-1444. Muller, S. W., and H. G. Schenck, 1943, Standard of Cretaceous System: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 27, no. 3, p. 262-278.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 185

Munier-Chalmas, E., and A. de Lapparent, 1893, Note sur la nomenclature des terrains sedimentaires: Soc. Geol. France Bull., 3me ser., v. 21, p. 438^188. Murchison, R. I., 1839, The Silurian System: London, 768 p. (see anonymous review in Edinburgh Review, April 1841, v. 147, p. 1-41.) Murchison, R. I., 1841, First sketch of some of the principal results of a second geologi­ cal survey o f Russia: Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., 3rd ser., v. 19, no. 126, p. 417^-22. Murphy, M. A., 1977, On time-stratigraphic units: Jour. Paleontology, v. 51, no. 2, p. 213-219. Nabholz, W. K., 1951, Beziehungen zwischen Fazies und Zeit: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 44, no. l,p. 131-158. Nalivkin, D. V., 1956, A study of facies: The environment of deposition (in Russian): “Nauka,” Moscow, v. 1, 534 p., v. 2, 393 p. (Reviewed by M. Burgunker in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 1, no. 1, 1959, p. 103-111.) Newell, N. D., 1962a, Paleontological gaps and geochronology: Jour. Paleontology, v. 36, no. 3, p. 592-610. Newell, N. D., 1962b, Geology’s time : Natural History, v. 71, p. 32-37. Newell, N. D., 1966, Problems of geochronology: Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Proc., v. 118, no. 3, p. 63-89. Newell, N. D., 1967a, Paraconformities: in Essays in paleontology and stratigraphy: Univ. of Kansas, Dept. Geology Spec. Publ. 2 (R. C. Moore commemorative volume, C. Teichert and E. L. Yochelson, eds.), p. 349-367. Newell, N. D., 1967b, Revolutions in the history of life: Geol. Soc. America Special Paper 89, p. 63-91. Newell, N. D., 1972, Stratigraphic gaps and chronostratigraphy: 24th Int. Geol. Congress (Montreal, 1972), sec. 7, p. 198-204. Newell, N. D., 1973, The very last moment of the Paleozoic Era: in The and Triassic Systems and their mutual boundary (A. Logan and L. V. Hills, eds.), Cana­ dian Soc. Petroleum Geol. Mem. 2, p. 1-10. Newton, A. R., 1968, Correlation and nomenclature in the Precambrian: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., Annexure to v. 71 (Rhodesian Branch), p. 215-224. Nikitin, I. F., and A. I. Zhamoida (eds.), 1984, Practical stratigraphy— working out of stratigraphic base for large-scale geological survey (in Russian with English sum­ mary and table of contents): “Nedra,” Leningrad, 320 p. Nikolov, T., I. Sapunov, and J. Stephanov, 1965, Notes concerning the orthography of stage names (in Bulgarian): Bulgarian Geol. Soc. Rev., v. 26, no. 1, p. 115-117. North, F. K., 1964, The geological time-scale: in Geochronology in Canada (F. F. Osborne, ed.): Royal Soc. Canada Spec. Publ. 8, Univ. Toronto Press, p. 5-8. North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by J. B. Hen­ derson, W. G. E. Caldwell, and J. E. Harrison), 1980, Report 8—Amendment of Code concerning terminology for igneous and high-grade metamorphic rocks: Geol. Soc. America Bull., Part I, v. 91, no. 6, p. 374—376. North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by J. E. Harrison and Z. E. Peterman), 1980, Note 52—A preliminary proposal for a chronometric time scale for the Precambrian of the United States and Mexico: Geol. Soc. America Bull., Part I, v. 91, no. 6, p. 377-380. North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by J. E. Harrison and Z. E. Peterman), 1982, Report 9—Adoption of geochronometric units for divi­ sion of Precambrian time: Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 66, no. 6, p. 801-804.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 186 Bibliography

North American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature (prepared by R. H. Fakun- diny and S. A. Longacre), 1989, Note 57—Application for amendment of North American Stratigraphic Code to provide for exclusive informal use of morphological terms such as , intrusion, pluton, stock, plug, , , diapir, and body: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 73, no. 11, p. 1452-1453. Odell, J., 1975, Error estimation in stratigraphic correlation: Mathematical Geol., v. 7, no. 2, p. 167-182. Odin, G. S. (ed.), 1982a, Numerical dating in stratigraphy: John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2 vol., 1040 p. Odin, G. S., 1982b, The Phanerozoic time scale revisited: Episodes, v. 1982, no. 3, p. 3-9. Odin, G. S., 1984, The numerical age of system, series, and stage boundaries of the Phan­ erozoic column: in Stratigraphy quo vadis? (E. Seibold and J. D. Meulenkamp, eds.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 16, p. 61-64. Ogg, J. G., and W. Lowrie, 1986, Magnetostratigraphy of the Jurassic/Cretaceous bound­ ary: Geology, v. 14, no. 7, p. 547-550. Ogose, S., 1950, An opinion on the classification of strata (in Japanese with English ab­ stract.): Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 56, p. 459-469. Ogose, S., 1953, On the stratigraphic nomenclature (in Japanese): Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 59, p. 65-74. Omalius d'Halloy, J. B. d’, 1831a, Elements de Geologie: Levrault, Paris, 558 p. (see p. 79-97, De la division des terrains.) Omalius d'Halloy, J. B. d’, 1831b, Observations sur la classification des terrains: Soc. Geol. France Bull., 1st ser., v. 1 (1830-1831), no. 9, p. 213-220. Oppel, A., 1856-1858, Die Juraformation Englands, Frankreichs und des siidwestlichen Deutschlands: Jahreshefte Vereins fiir vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirttemberg, Jahrg. 12 (1856), p. 121-556, Jahrg. 13 (1857), p. 141-396, Jahrg. 14 (1858), p. 129-291, Ebner & Seubert, Stuttgart. Oppel, A., 1862, Palaeontologische Mittheilungen aus dem Museum des Konigl. Bayer Staates: Stuttgart, 322 p. Orbigny, A. d', 1849-52, Cours elementaire de paleontologie et de geologie strati- graphiques, vol. 1 (1849), 299 p.; vol. 2 (in 2 parts, 1852), 847 p.: Masson, Paris. Oriel, S. S., 1959, Problems of stratigraphic boundaries: in Paleotectonic maps—Triassic System, U.S. Geol. Survey, Misc. Geol. Investigations, Map 1-300, p. 5. Oriel, S. S., 1975, Note 41 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)—Application for amendment of article 8 of Code, concerning smallest formal rock-stratigraphic unit: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 59, no. 1, p. 134-135. Oriel, S. S., R. W. Macqueen, J. A. Wilson, and B. Dalrymple, 1976, Note 44 (of. Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Application for addition to Code concerning magnetostrati­ graphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 60, no. 2, p. 273-277. Orombelli, G., 1971, Concetti stratigrafici utilizzabili nello studio dei depositi continen- tali quatemari: Riv. Ital. Paleont. Strat., v. 77, no. 3, p. 265-291. O’Rourke, J. E., 1976, Pragmatism versus materialism in stratigraphy: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 276, no. 1, p. 47-55. Otto, G. H., 1938, The sedimentation unit and its use in field sampling: Jour. Geol., v. 46, no. 4, p. 569-582. Ovechkin, N. K., 1957, Some debated questions on stratigraphic classification (in Rus­ sian): Sov. Geol., Sbomik 55, p. 8-30. Ovechkin, N. K., 1961, The degree of study of stratigraphy of the territory of the USSR and further tasks (in Russian); VSEGEI, Byul., no. 3, p. 5-24.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 187

Owen, D. E., 1978, Usage of stratigraphic nomenclature and concepts in the Journal of Sedimentary Petrology or time, place, and rocks— how to keep them separate: Jour. Sedimentary Petrology, v. 48, no. 2, p. 355-358. Owen, D. E., 1987, Commentary: usage of stratigraphic terminology in papers, illustra­ tions and talks: Jour. Sedimentary Petrology, v. 57, no. 2, p. 363-372. Owens, B., 1970, A review of the palynological methods employed in the correlation of Paleozoic sediments: Liege Univ., Cong. Colloq. (1969), v. 55, p. 99-112. Oyen, F. H. van, 1964, La palynologie stratigraphique dans le cadre de la stratigraphie paleontologique: Inst. Francais du Petrole Rev., v. 19, no. 2, p. 183-195. Paech, W., 1971, Zur Analyse des Begriffe der geologischen Formation: Zeitschr. Angew. Geol., v. 17, no. 5, p. 195-201. Page, D., 1859, Classification of the materials composing the earth's crust into systems, groups and series: Chapter 6, p. 85-96, of Advanced text-book of geology, 2nd ed., Blackwood, Edinburgh and London, 403 p. Palmer, A. R., 1965, Biomere— a new kind o f biostratigraphic unit: Jour. Paleontology, v. 39, no. 1, p. 149-153. Palmer, A. R., 1983, The decade of North American Geology 1983 Geologic Time Scale: Geology, v. 11, no. 9, p. 503-504. Parker, F. L., 1965, Irregular distributions of planktonic foraminifera and stratigraphic correlation: in Progress in oceanography, v. 3, Pergamon Press, Oxford, p. 267-272. Patterson, J. R., 1987, Superposition and the Law of Regularity in stratal order— keys to practice and theory o f global stratigraphy: Jour. Petroleum Geol., v. 10, no. 2, p. 195-206. Patterson, J. R.,and T. P. Storey, 1957, Lithologic versus stratigraphic concepts: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 9, p. 2139-2142. (Discussion by R. M. Stainforth: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 1, p. 192-193,1958.) Perrodon, A., 1971, Des methodes et des tendances de la stratigraphie: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 1, no. 4, p. 19-28. Perrodon, A, 1972, Conclusions et essai de synthese: in Colloque sur les methodes et ten­ dances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 985-999. Pia, J. von, 1930, Grundbegriffe der Stratigraphie mit ausfiihrlicher Anwendung auf die europaische Mitteltrias: F. Deuticke, Leipzig-Vienna, 253 p. Pia, J. von, 1937, Das Wesen der geologischen Chronologie: Deuxieme Congres pour Tavancement des etudes de stratigraphie carbonifere (Heerlen, 1935) C. R., v. 2, p. 857-902. Pichamuthu, C. S., 1970, On the use of the term “Archaean” in Precambrian stratigraphy: Curr. Sci. (India), v. 39, no. 23, p. 525-528. Plumb, K. A., 1991, New Precambrian time scale: Episodes, v. 14, no. 2, p. 139-140. Plumb, K. A., and H. L. James, 1986, Subdivision of Precambrian time: recommenda­ tions and suggestions by the Subcommission on Precambrian Stratigraphy: Precam­ brian Research, v. 32, no. 1, p. 65-92. Poag, C. W., and P. C. Valentine, 1976, Biostratigraphy and ecostratigraphy of the Pleis­ tocene basin, Texas-Louisiana continental shelf: Gulf Assoc. Geol. Soc. Trans., v. 26, p. 185-256. Pomerol, C., 1973, Stratigraphie et paleogeographie: Ere cenozoique: Doin, Paris, 272 p. Pomerol, C., 1975, Stratigraphie et paleogeographie: Ere mesozoi'que: Doin, Paris, 384 p. Pomerol, C., 1988, Limites evenementielles ou limites conventionnelles en stratigraphie?: Soc. Geol. France Bull., 8th ser., v. 4, no. 2, p. 357-360. Pomerol, C., and C. Babin, 1977, Precambrien-Ere paleozoi'que: Doin, Paris, 430 p.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 188 Bibliography

Pomerol, C., et al., 1980, Stratigraphie et Paleogeographie— principes et methodes: Doin, Paris, 209 p. Pomerol, C., et al., 1987, Stratigraphie— methodes, principes, applications: Doin, Paris, 282 p. Pompeckj, J. F., 1914, Die Bedeutung des schwabischen Jura fur die Erdgeschichte: Schweizerbartsche Buch., Stuttgart, 64 p. Powell, J. W., 1882, Plan of publication: U.S. Geol. Survey 2nd Ann. Report, 588 p. (see p. xl-xlviii): 2nd Int. Geol. Cong. (Bologna, 1881) C. R., p. 627-641. Powell, J. W., 1888, Methods of geologic cartography in use by the United States Geological Survey: 3rd Int. Geol. Congress (Berlin, 1885) C. R., p. 221-240. Poyarkov, V. V., 1974, On a method for distinguishing regional stratigraphic subdivi­ sions (formations) (in Russian): Byul. Mosk. Obshch. Ispyt. Prirody, Otd. Geol., v. 49, no. 5, p. 5-12. Predtechensky, N. N. (compiler), 1983, Purpose and rules for studying and describing key stratigraphic horizons (in Russian): VSEGEI, Interdepartmental Strat. Comm. USSR, Leningrad, 33 p. Prevot, M., 1972, Inversions de la polarite geomagnetique et stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 891-903. Procter, R. M., 1966, Interrelationship of paleontology and stratigraphic studies: in A re­ view of current and stratigraphic research in Canada: Geol. Survey of Canada, Topical Report 116. Prothero, D. R., 1990, Interpreting the stratigraphic record: W. H. Freeman, New York, 410 p. Prozorovsky, V. A., 1987a, Stratigraphic scales (in Russian): Byul. LGU, ser. 7 (geol. geoph.), vyp. 1, p. 64-68. Prozorovsky, V. A., 1987b, On category of main stratigraphic units (in Russian): Byul. Mosk. Obshch. Ispyt. Prirody, Otd. Geol., t. 62, no. 5, p. 37—42. Quennell, A. M., 1960, Report of East-central Regional Comm, for Geology, Sub-Comm. on Stratigraphical Nomenclature: Comm. Tech. Co-op. Africa south of Sahara, Publ. 44, p. 11-26. Quenstedt, W., 1951-1952, Uber grundlegende Begriffe der Stratigraphie und ihre Anwendung: Acta Albertina (Regensburger Naturwissenschaften), Bd. 20, no. 1, p. 47-52. Raggatt, H. G., 1953, A.N.Z.A.A.S. Standing Committee on stratigraphic nomenclature, first and second meetings: Australian Jour. Sci., v. 15, no. 4, p. 122-125. Raggatt, H. G., 1956, Time division of Precambrian: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 2, p. 388. (Discussion by M. Kay: Precambrian and Protozoic: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., v. 40, no. 7, p. 1722-1723, 1956.) Raggatt, H. G., 1957, Time division of Precambrian: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 2, p. 333. Ramsbottom, W. H. C., 1977, Major cycles of transgression and regression in the Namu- rian: Geol. Soc. Proc., v. 41, p. 261-291. Ramsbottom, W. H. C., 1978, mesothems in South Wales and northern France: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 135, pt. 3, p. 307-312. Rankama, K., 1970, , Archean and other weeds in the Precambrian rock gar­ den: Geol. Soc. Finland Bull., v. 42, p. 211-222. Rastall, R. H., 1944, Palaeozoic, Mesozoic, and Kainozoic: a geological disaster: Geol. Mag., v. 81, p. 159-165.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 189

Rat, P., 1972, Etude sur la zone et son emploi en stratigraphie: Comite Francais de Stratigraphie, C. R. de la seance de travail du 18 1972 a Dijon, Feuille no. 4, 11 p. Rat, P., 1980, Le temps en geologie: approche stratigraphique: Soc. Geol. France, Fibre Jubilaire du Cent Cinquantenaire, 1830-1980, Mem. Hors-Serie 20, p. 107-118. Rat, P., 1984, Nos echelles stratigraphiques son entierement evenementielles: Soc. Geol. France Bull., 7me ser., v. 26, p. 1171-1175. Rausser-Chernousova, D. M., 1953, Periodicity in the evolution of foraminifera of the Upper Paleozoic and its importance for subdivision and correlation of sections (in Russian): Materialy paleontologicheskogo soveshtchaniya po paleozoyu, May 14-17, 1951: USSR Acad. Sci., Moscow. Rausser-Chernousova, D. M., 1966, Zur Frage des Zonenbegriffes in der Biostratig- raphie: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 59, no. 1, p. 21-31. Rausser-Chernousova, D. M., 1967, Zones of the international and regional stratigraphic scales (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 7. Rausser-Chernousova, D. M., 1980, On local stratigraphic zones (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 3, p. 18-28. Reguant, S., 1971, Los conceptos de facies en estratigraffa: Acta Geol. Hispanica, t. 6, no. 4, p. 97-101. Reguant, S., 1989, Nomenclaturas estratigraficas nacionales e internacionales: descrip­ tion y evaluacidn: in Division de unidades estratigraficas en el analisis de cuencas (J. A. Vera, ed.): Soc. Geol. Espaiia Rev., v. 2, nos. 3-4, p. 177-188. Reguant, S., O. Riba, and A. Maldonado, 1975, Acerca de los transitos verticales y hori- zontales en las secuencias estratigraficas: Bol. Estratigr., v. 2, p. 19-32. Reiss, Z., 1966, Significance of stratigraphic categories— a review: in IUGS Com. Stratigr., Committee Mediterranean Neog. Stratigr., Proc. Third Session (Berne, 1964, C. W. Drooger et al., eds.): E. J. Brill, Leiden, p. 9-17. Reiss, Z., 1968, Planktonic foraminiferids, stratotypes, and a reappraisal of Neogene chronostratigraphy in Israel: Israel Jour. Earth-Sci., v. 17, no. 4, p. 153-169. Remane, J., 1975, Versuch einer pragmatischen Stratigraphie: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 4, no. 1, p. 6-19. Renevier, E., 1897, Chronographie geologique: 6th Int. Geol. Cong. (Zurich, 1894), C. R., p. 521-695. (see particularly Les facies ou formations, p. 528-581, and Post- scriptum, p. 695.) Renevier, E., 1901, Report of Commission Internationale de Classification Stratigraph­ ique: 8th Int. Geol. Cong. (Paris, 1900), C. R., fasc. 1, p. 192-203. Renevier, E., et al., 1882, Rapport du comite suisse sur l'unification de la nomenclature: 2nd Int. Geol. Cong. (Bologne, 1881), C. R., p. 535-548. Renzi, M., J. Martinell, and S. Reguant, 1975, Biostratigraffa, tafonorma, y paleo- ecologfa: Acta Geol. Hispanica, Ano X, no. 2, p. 80-86. Riba, O., 1989, Unidades tectosedimentarias y secuencias deposicionales: in Division de unidades estratigraficas en el analisis de cuencas (J. A. Vera, ed.): Soc. Geol. Espaiia Rev., v. 2, nos. 3-4, p. 189-198. Richarz, S., 1926, Biotic basis of stratigraphy: (Review in Pan-Am. Geol., v. 46, p. 101-110). Richmond, G. M., and J. C. Frye, 1957, Note 19 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)— Status of soils in stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 4, p. 758-763. Richmond, G. M., and J. G. Fyles, 1964, Note 30 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)— Application to American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature for an amend­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 190 Bibliography

ment of Article 31, Remark (b) of the Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature on misuse of the term “stage”: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 48, no. 5, p. 710-711. Richter, R., 1954, Die Priori tat in der Stratigraphie und der Fall Kiblen- zium/Siegenium/Emsium: Senckenbergiana Lethaea, v. 34, nos. 4-6, p. 327-338. Riedel, W. R., 1973, Cenozoic planktonic micropaleontology and biostratigraphy: Ann. Review Earth Planetary Sci., v. 1, p. 241-268. Riedel, W. R., M. N. Bramlette, and F. L. Parker, 1963, “Pliocene-Pleistocene” boundary in deep-sea sediments: Science, v. 140, no. 3572, p. 1238-1240. Rioult, M., 1971, Alcide d'Orbigny et les etages du Jurassique: Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 17-33. Rivero, F. C. de, 1965, Codigos estratigraficos: unos comentarios: Asoc. Venezolana Geol., Min. y Petroleo Bol. Informativo, v. 8, no. 8, p. 219-223. Riviere, A., 1972, Place et role des methodes paleoclimatiques en stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 699-703. Robison, R. A., A. V. Rosova, A. J. Rowell, and T. P. Fletcher, 1977, Cambrian bound­ aries and divisions: Lethaia, v. 10, no. 3, p. 257-262. Roche, A., 1972, Faiblesses et possibilites de la methode paleomagnetique dans son em- ploi en stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 853-855. Rodgers, J., 1950, The nomenclature and classification of sedimentary rocks: Amer. Jour. Sci., v. 248, no. 5, p. 297-311. Rodgers, J., 1954, Nature, usage and nomenclature of stratigraphic units: a minority re­ port: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 38, no. 4, p. 655-659. Rogers, J., 1959, The meaning o f correlation: Am Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 684-691. Rogers, J., and R. B. McConnell, 1959, Note 23 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)—Need for rock-stratigraphic units larger than group: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 43, no. 8, p. 1971-1975. Roger, J., 1972, Vue d’ensemble sur les methodes paleontologiques en stratigraphie: la biostratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, p. 449-457. Rognon, P., 1972, Utilisation de certaines discontinuity sedimentaires d'origine clima- tique comme reperes stratigraphiques: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 705-713. Ross, C. A., 1970, Concepts in late Paleozoic correlations: in and pa- leontologic zonation (O. L. Bandy, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Special Paper 124, p. 7-36. Rotay, A. P., 1953, Paleontological method and stratigraphy (in Russian): Materialy pale- ontologicheskogo soveshtchaniya po paleozoyu 1951, USSR Acad. Sci., Moscow, p. 88-91. Rotay, A. P., 1962, Paleontological method and problem of species in stratigraphy (in Russian): Izd. Kievskogo Univ., Kiev, 44 p. Rozanov, A. Yu., (ed.), 1977, Stratigraphic subdivisions (in Russian): Results of science and technology, Stratigraphy and Paleontology, v. 8, 112 p. Rueller, K. H., 1971, Die Korrelation von Stratigraphie und physikalischen Daten der seismischen Aufnahmen, ein Versuch: Ingenieurmassige Lagerstattenbeschreibung, p. 273-296, Clausthal-Zellefeld. Ruhe, R. V., 1965, Quaternary paleopedology: in The Quaternary of the United States (H. E. Wright, Jr., and D. G. Frey, eds.): Princeton Univ. Press, p. 755-764.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 191

Ruzhentsev, V. E., 1977, Biochronotype or stratotype? (in Russian): Paleontologitcheckiy Zhour., no. 2, p. 23-34. Ryan, W. B. F., 1973, Paleomagnetic stratigraphy: Initial reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, v. 13, part 2, p. 1380-1387. Sadaykov, A. M., 1969, A system of universal stratigraphic classification (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 1. Sadaykov, A. M., 1974, Ideas of rational stratigraphy (as exemplified by central Kazakh­ stan) (in Russian): “Nauka,” Alma-Ata, 184 p. Sadaykov, A. M., 1977, Cyclicity and ideas of rational stratigraphy (in Russian): in Major problems of sedimentogenesis cyclicity: “Nauka,” Alma-Ata, p. 192-195. Sadler, P. M., 1981, Sediment accumulation rates and the completeness of stratigraphic sections: Jour. Geol., v. 89, no. 5, p. 569-584. Salin, Yu. S., 1976, A mathematical formulation of traditional methods of stratigraphic correlation (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 8, p. 85-92. Salin, Yu. S., 1979, Constructive stratigraphy (in Russian): “Nauka,” Moscow, 173 p. Salvador, A., 1980, A guide set for units of polarity: Geotimes v. 25, no. 9, p. 21-23. Samuel, O., and I. Brockova (eds.), 1979, Slovac nomenclature of stratigraphic units (in Slovak): Geologicke prace Spravy, v. 73, p. 241-264. Savitskiy, V. E., 1969, Rules of stratigraphic classification and terminology and the na­ ture of chronostratigraphic units (In Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 84-99, Novosibirsk. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusa­ lem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 73-86.) Savitskiy, V. E., 1970, Principles of determination of lower Cambrian boundary and boundaries of other major chronostratigraphic units of the Phanerozoic (in Russian): in Materialy po regionalnoy geologii Sibiri, Trudy, SNIGGMS, no. 110, p. 11-23. Savitskiy, V. E., 1975, Formation, horizon, informal stage (in Russian): in Materialy po regionalnoy geologii Sibiri, Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 216, p. 6-11. Schaub, H., 1968, A propos de quelques etages du Paleocene et de l' du bassin de Paris et leur correlation avec les etages de la Tethys: in Colloque sur l'Eocene (Paris, 1968), BRGM France, Mem. 58, p. 643-653. Scheltema, R. S., 1977, Dispersal of marine invertebrate organisms: paleobiogeographic and biostratigraphic implications: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 73-108. Schenck, H. G., 1940, Applied paleontology: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 24, no. 10, p. 1752-1778. Schenck, H. G., 1961, Guiding principles in stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. India Jour., v. 2, p. 1-10. Schenck, H. G., H. D. Hedberg, and R. M. Kleinpell, 1935, Stage as a stratigraphic unit (abstr.): Pam-Am. Geol., v. 64, no. 1, p. 70-71; Geol. Soc. America Proc. for 1935, p. 347-348, June 1936. Schenck, H. G., and R. M. Kleinpell, 1936, Refugian stage of Pacific Coast Tertiary: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 20, no. 2, p. 215-225. Schenck, H. G., et al., 1941, Stratigraphic nomenclature—Discussion: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 25, no. 12, p. 2195-2212. Schenck, H. G., and S. W. Muller, 1941, Stratigraphic terminology: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 52, p. 1419-1426. Schenck, H. G., and J. J. Graham, 1960, Subdividing a geologic section: Sci. Rep.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 192 Bibliography

Tohoku Univ., 2nd ser. (Geol.) Spec. v. 4 (Professor Shoshiro Hanzawa Memorial Volume), p. 92-99. Schindewolf, O. H., 1944, Grundlagen und Methoden der palaontologischen Chrono- logie: Gebriider Borntraeger, Berlin-Zehlendorf, 139 p. (2nd ed., 1945). Schindewolf, O. H., 1950, Grundlagen und Methoden der palaontologischen Chrono- logie, 3rd edition: Berlin-Nikolassee, Naturwissenschaftlicher Verlag, 152 p. Schindewolf, O. H., 1954a, Uber einige stratigraphische Grundbegriffe: Roemeriana, v. 1, Dahlgriin-Festschrift, p. 23-38. (English translation in Int. Geol. Rev., v. 1, no. 7, 1959, p. 62-70.) Schindewolf, O. H., 1954b, Liber die moglichen Ursachen der grossen erdgeschichtlichen Faunenschnitte: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., no. 10, p. 457^165. Schindewolf, O. H., 1955a, Kleinforaminiferen und palaontologische Chronologie: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., no. 2, p. 82-84. Schindewolf, O. H., 1955b, Die Entfaltung des Lebens im Rahmen der geologischen Zeit: Studium Generale, 8 Jahrg., H. 8, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, p. 489^197. Schindewolf, O. H., 1957, Comments on some stratigraphic terms: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 255, no. 6, p. 394-399. Schindewolf, O. H., 1958, Zur Aussprache ilber die grossen erdgeschichtlichen Faunenschnitte und ihre Verursachung: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., no. 6, p. 270-279. Schindewolf, O. H., 1960, Stratigraphische Methodik und Terminologie: Geol. Rund­ schau, v. 49, no. 1, p. 1-35. Schindewolf, O. H., 1963, Neokatastrophismus?: Deutsche Geol. Ges. Zeitschr., Jahrg. 1962, v. 114, pt. 2, p. 430^145. Schindewolf, O. H., 1964, Logic and method of stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans, and Proc., v. 67, p. 306-310. Schindewolf, O. H., 1970a, Stratigraphical principles: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 1, no. 2 p. 17-24. Schindewolf, O. H., 1970b, Stratigraphie und Stratotypus: Akad. Wiss. Lit. Mainz, Math.— Naturwiss. Kl., Abh., no. 2, 134 p. (Essay review by Z. de Csema: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 272, no. 2, p. 189-194, 1972.) Schoch, R. M., 1989, Stratigraphy: Principles and methods: Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 375 p. Schopf, J. M., 1960, Emphasis on Holotype (?): Science, v. 131, p. 1043. Schuchert, C. E., 1916, Correlation and chronology in geology on the basis of paleogeog- raphy: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 27, p. 491-514. Schuchert, C. E., 1937, What is the basis of stratigraphic chronology?: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 34, p. 475^179. Schuchert, C. E., 1943, Stratigraphy of the eastern and central United States: Wiley, New York, 1013 p. (see p. 1-10, and 18-24.) Schuchert, C. E., and J. Barrell, 1914, A revised geological time-table for North America: Am. Jour. Sci., ser. 4, v. 38, no. 223, p. 1-27. Schultz, E. H., 1982, The chronosome and supersome: terms proposed for low-rank chronostratigraphic units: Canadian Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 30, no. 1, p. 29-33. Scott, G. H., 1960, The type locality concept in time-stratigraphy: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 3, no. 4, p. 580-584. Scott, G. H., 1965, Homotaxial stratigraphy: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 8, no. 5, p. 859-862. Scott, G. H., 1967, Time in stratigraphy: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 10, p. 300-301.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 193

Scott, G. H., 1971, Revision of the Hutchinsonian, Awamoan, and Altonian stages (Lower Miocene, New Zealand)— 1: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 14, no. 4, p. 705-726. Scott, G. H., 1978, Stratotypes and lithostratigraphic definitions: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 7, no. 1, p. 1-7. Sdzuy, K., 1960, Zur Wende Prakambrium/Kambrium: Palaont. Zeitschr., v. 34, p. 154-160. Sdzuy, K., 1962, Richtschnitt oder Leitfossil?: Symposium-Band, Silur-Devon Grenze, 1960, p.231-233, E. Schweizerbart, Stuttgart. Seaber, P. R., 1988, Hydrostratigraphic units: in (W. Back, J. S. Resen- shein, and P. R. Seaber, eds.): Geol. Soc. America, The Geology of North America, v. 0-2, p. 9-14. Sedgwick, A., 1838, A synopsis of English series of stratified rocks . . . : Geol. Soc. London Proc., v. 2, no. 58, p. 675-690. Seibold, E., and J. D. Meulenkamp (eds.), 1984, Stratigraphy quo vadis?: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 16, 70 p. Seitz, O., 1931, Uber Raum- und Zeitvorstellung in der Stratigraphie und deren Bedeu- tung fiir die statigraphischen Grundprinzipien: Sitzungsber. Preuss. Geol. Lande- samt., H. 6, p. 87-99, Berlin. Seitz, O., 1932, Erganzende Bemerkungen liber stratigraphische Raum und Zeitbegriffe: Jb. Preuss. Geol. Landesamt. fiir 1931, v. 52, p. 520-522, Berlin. Seitz, O., 1958, Gibt es eine Chronostratigraphie?: Geol. Jb., Bd. 75, p. 647-650. Semikhatov, M. A., 1973, The general stratigraphic scale of the Upper Precambrian: the present state and perspectives (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol. no. 9, p. 3-17. Semikhatov, M. A., 1979, The new stratigraphic scale of Precambrian of the USSR: analysis and the lessons gained (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 5-22. Senes, J., 1987, Some notes to the terms standard, regional and local stages: Geologica Carpatica, v. 38, no. 6, p. 691-693. Serra, O., 1972, Diagraphies et stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 2, p. 775-832. Shantser, E. V., 1960, Units of single and local stratigraphic scales of the Quaternary (Anthropogene) system. Draft of determination with respect to the North Eurasia (in Russian): Byul. MSK, no. 2, p. 61-64. Shantser, E. V., 1980, Climate-stratigraphic units of the Quaternary (Anthropogen) System and their place in stratigraphic classification (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 153-164. Shantser, E. V., 1.1. Krasnov, and K. V. Nikiforova, 1973, Stratigraphic classification, ter­ minology and principles for constructing a general stratigraphic scale applicable to the Quaternary (Anthropogene) System (in Russian): Moscow, 37 p. Shaw, A. B., 1964, Time in stratigraphy: McGraw-Hill, New York, 365 p. Shaw, A. B., 1969, Adam and Eve, paleontology, and the non-objective arts: Jour. Paleontology, v. 43, no. 5, p. 1085-1098. Shi Tie-min, 1959, The problem of stratigraphic units in the nomenclature of regional stratigraphic subdivisions (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 8, p. 380-381. Sigal, J., 1961, Existe-t-il plusieurs ?: BRGM France, Serv. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., 13th year, no. 51, p. 2-5.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 194 Bibliography

Sigal, J., 1964, Une therapeutique homeopathique en chronostratigraphie: les parastrato- types (ou pretendus tels): BRGM France, Serv. Inform. Geol. Bull. Trimest., no. 64, p. 1-8. Simakov, K. V., 1974a, Time in stratigraphy (in Russian): in Methodologicheskye Voprosy Geologicheskikh Nauk. Izd. “Naukova Dumka,” Kiev, p. 81-106. Simakov, K. V., 1974b, Stratigraphy, and geochronology (in Russian): in Osnovnye Problemy Biostratigrafii i Paleogeografii Severo-Vostoka SSSR: Trudy Sev.-Vost. Kompleks. Inst. USSR Acad. Sci., vyp. 62, p. 17-25. Simakov, K. V., 1975, The international stratigraphic scale— calendar and metrics of geo­ logic time (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 4, p. 114-123. Simakov, K. V., 1977, Theoretical fundamentals for subdividing geologic time (in Rus­ sian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 4, p. 49-57. Simon, W., 1948, Zeitmarken der Erde: Grund und Grenze geologischer Forschung (Die Wissenschaft, v. 98): Vieweg and Sohn, Braunschweig, 232 p. Simon, W., 1960, Geologische Zeitrechnung in Dilemma: Naturwiss. Rundschau, Jahrg. 13, H. 12, p. 461^165. Simon, W., 1962, Stratigraphische Gliederung, Terminologie, und Nomenklatur: in Leit- fossilien der Mikropalaontologie: Borntraeger, Berlin, p. 23-29. Simon, W., and H. J. Lippolt, 1967, Geochronologie als Zeitgeriist der Phylogenie: in Die Evolution der Organismen (G. Fleberer, ed.), v. 1: Fischer, Stuttgart, p. 161-237. Simonson, R. W., 1952, Lessons from the first half century of soil survey: Pt. I, Classification of soils: Soil Sci., v. 74, p. 249-257. Sloss, L. L., 1958, Paleontologic and lithologic associations: Jour. Paleontology, v. 32, no. 4, p. 715-729. Sloss, L. L., 1960a, Concepts and applications of stratigraphic facies in North America: 21st Int. Geol. Congress (Norden, 1960), pt. 12, p. 7-18. Sloss, L. L., 1960b, Interregional time-stratigraphic correlation (abstr.): Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 71, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1976. Sloss, L. L., 1963, Sequences in the cratonic interior of North America: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 74, no. 2, p. 93-113. Sloss, L. L., 1984, The greening of stratigraphy 1933-1983: Ann. Review Earth Planetary Sci., v. 12, p. 1-10. Sloss, L. L., 1988, Forty years of : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 100, no. 11, p. 1661-1665. Sloss, L. L., 1991, The tectonic factor in sea level change: a countervailing view: Jour. Geophysical Research, v. 96, no. B4, p. 6609-6617. Sloss, L. L., 1992, Tectonic episodes of cratons: conflicting North American concepts: Terra Nova, v. 4, no. 3, p. 320-328. Sloss, L. L., W. C. Krumbein, and E. C. Dapples, 1949, Integrated facies analysis: in Sedimentary facies in geologic history (C. R. Longwell, ed.): Geol. Soc. America Mem. 39, p. 91-123. Smith, D. G., and M. D. Pewtrell, 1979, A use of network diagrams in depicting strati­ graphic time-correlation: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 136, no. 1, p. 21-28. Smith, W., 1815, A memoir to the map and delineation of the strata of England and Wales, with a part o f Scotland: John Cary, London, 51 p. Smith, W., 1816-1819, Strata identified by organized fossils containing prints on coloured paper of the most characteristic specimens in each stratum: W. Arding, London, 32 p., 17 plates. Smith, W., 1817, Stratigraphical system of organized fossils, with reference to the speci­

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 195

mens of the original collection in the British Museum: explaining their state of preser­ vation and their use in identifying the British strata: E. Williams, London, 118 p. Snelling, N., 1964, A review of recent Phanerozoic time-scales: in The Phanerozoic time- scale (W. B. Harland, A. G. Smith, and B. Wilcock, eds.): Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 120s, p. 29-36. Snelling, N., 1985, The chronology of the geological record: Geol. Soc. London Memoir 10, 343 p. Snelling, N., 1987, Measurement of geological time and the geological time scale: Modern Geology, v. 11, p. 365-374. Sohl, N. F., 1977a, Note 45 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)— Application for amendment concerning terminology for igneous and high-grade metamorphic rocks: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 61, no. 2, p. 248-251. Sohl, N. F., 1977b, Note 46 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nomen.)—Application for amendment of Articles 8 and 10 of Code, concerning smallest formal rock-stratigraphic unit: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 61, no. 2, p. 252. Sohl, N. F., 1978, Note 48 (of Am. Comm. Strat. Nome.)— Application for amendment of Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature to provide guidelines concerning formal terminol­ ogy of oceanic rocks: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 62, no. 7, p. 1185-1186. Sokolov, B. S., 1971, Biochronology and stratigraphical boundaries (in Russian): in Problemy obschey i regional’noy geologii: Inst. Geol. Geofiz., Novosibirsk, p. 155-178. Sokolov, B. S., 1974a, Periodicity (stagewise)—development of the organic world and biostratigraphic boundaries (in Russian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 1, p. 3-10. Sokolov, B. S., 1974b, The problem of the Precambrian-Cambrian boundary (in Russian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 2, p. 3-29. Sokolov, B. S., 1977, Prospects of the Precambrian biostratigraphy (in Russian): Geol. i Geofiz., no. 11, p. 54—70. Sokolov, B. S., 1978, Stage character of the organic world evolution and biostratigraphic boundaries (in Russian): in Trans, of the XVIII Session of the All-Union Paleontological Society: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 5-11. Sokolov, B. S., 1980, On the fundamentals of stratigraphic classification (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 7-11. Southam, J. R., W. W. Hay, and T. R. Worsley, 1975, Quantitative formulation of relia­ bility in stratigraphic correlation: Science, v. 188, p. 357-359. (Discussion by G. F. Brockman: Science, v. 190, p. 1116, 1975.) Spieker, E. M., 1956, Mountain-building chronology and nature of geologic time scale: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 8, p. 1769-1815. Spizharsky, T. N., 1987, Geological time and stratigraphic classification (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 8, p. 45-53. Stainforth, R. M., 1956, Meaning of the word stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 9, p. 2289-2290. Stainforth, R. M., 1958, Stratigraphic concepts: Discussion: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 1, p. 192-193. Stamp, L. D., 1923, An introduction to stratigraphy (British Isles): Thomas Murby & Co., London, 368 p.; 3rd ed. (1957), 381 p. Stanton, T. W., 1930, Stratigraphic names: Report of Committee on Stratigraphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 14, no. 8, p. 1070-1079. Steiner, J., 1979, Regularities of the revised Phanerozoic Time Scale and the Precambrian Time Scale: Geol. Rundschau, v. 68, no. 2, p. 825-831.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 196 Bibliography

Steinker, P. J., and D. C. Steinker, 1972, The meaning of facies in stratigraphy: The Compass, v. 49, no. 2, p. 45-53. Steno, N., 1669, De solido intra solidum naturaliter contento dissertationis prodomus: Florence, 76 p. Stepanov, D. L., 1958, Principles and methods of biostratigraphic investigations (in Russian): Trudy, VNIGRI, no. 113, 180 p. (French translation by Mme. Jayet, S.I.G., Trad. 2231, 148 p.) Stepanov, D. L., 1967, Basic principles of stratigraphy (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 10, p. 103-114. Stepanov, D. L., 1974, General geological bases for using the paleontological method in stratigraphy (in Russian): in Biostratigrafiya Mezozoya osadochnykh basseinov SSSR: Trudy, VNIGRI, Leningrad, vyp. 350, p. 5-33. Stepanov, D. L., and M. S. Mesezhnikov, 1979, General Stratigraphy (Principles and methods of stratigraphic investigations) (in Russian): “Nedra,” Leningrad, 423 p. (see Chapter 8— Stratigraphic classification and nomenclature, p. 327-380). Stephanov, J., 1966, The International stratigraphic scheme and the boundary between the Middle and Upper Jurassic: “Strasimir Dimitrov” Inst. Geol. Bui., v. 15, p. 79-88. Stephenson, L. W., 1917, Tongue, a new stratigraphic term, with illustrations from the Mississippi Cretaceous: Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 7, no. 9, p. 243-250. Stevenson, R. E., 1955, Two suggested rules for stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 39, no. 12, p. 2524-2525. Stockwell, C. H., 1964, Principles of time-stratigraphic classification in the Precambrian: in Geochronology in Canada (F. F. Osborne, ed.): Royal Soc. Canada Spec. Publi­ cation 8, Univ. Toronto Press, p. 52-60. Stokes, W. L., 1978, A plan for reforming the geologic time scale: Jour. Geol. Education, v. 26, p. 136-141. Storey, T. P., and J. R. Patterson, 1959, Stratigraphy— traditional and modern concepts: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 707-721. Stdrmer, L., 1966, Concepts of stratigraphic classification and terminology: Earth Sci­ ence Reviews, v. 1, no. 1, p. 5-28. Stubblefield, C. G., 1954, The relationship of paleontology to stratigraphy: Advancement of Science, no. 42, p. 149-159. Suggate, R. P., 1960, Time-stratigraphic subdivision of the Quaternary as viewed from New Zealand: Quaternaria, v. 5, p. 5-17. Sutton, A. FI., 1940, Time and stratigraphic terminology: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 51, no. 9, p. 1397-1412. Suzuki, K., 1950, Critical review of the stratigraphical classification in recent years (in Japanese with English abstract): Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 56, p. 383-397. Svoboda, J. (ed.), 1960, Prager Arbeitstagung iiber die Stratigraphie des Silurs und Devons: Geological Survey, Praha. Swain, F. M., 1949, Onlap, offlap, overstep, and overlap: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 33, no. 4, p. 634-636. Swann, D. Ft., and H. B. Willman, 1961, Megagroups in Illinois: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 45, p. 471-483. Sylvester-Bradley, P. C., 1967, Towards an international code of stratigraphic nomencla­ ture: in Essays in Palaeontology and Stratigraphy, R. C. Moore Commemorative Volume (C. Teichert and E. Yochelson, eds.): Dept. Geol., Univ. of Kansas, Spec. Publ. 2, p. 49-56. Sylvester-Bradley, P. C., 1968, Hierarchy in stratigraphical nomenclature: Geol. Mag., v. 105, no. 1, p. 78.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 197

Sylvester-Bradley, P. C., 1977, Biostratigraphic tests of evolutionary theory: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 41-63. Tan Sin Hok, 1931, On Cycloclypeus— its phylogeny and signification for the biostratig­ raphy in general and for the stratigraphy of the Tertiary of the Indo-Pacific region: Overgedrukt vit de “Handelingen” van het Zesde Nederlandsch-Indish Natuur- wetenschappelijk Congress (Bandoeng, Java, 1931), p. 641-644. Tedford, R. H., 1970, Principles and practices of mammalian geochronology in North America: in North Am.. Paleontol. Conv. (Chicago, 1969) Proc., pt. F (Correlation by Fossils), p. 666-703. Teichert, C., 1950, Zone concept in stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 34, no. 7, p. 1585-1588. Teichert, C., 1958a, Some biostratigraphical concepts: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 69, no. 1, p. 99-120. Teichert, C., 1958b, Concepts of facies: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 11, p. 2718-2744. Tenchov, Y. G., 1979, General impression and notes on the “International Stratigraphic Guide— a guide to stratigraphic classification and procedure”: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 7, no. 3, p. 155-158. Termier, H., and G. Termier, 1964, Les temps fossiliferes, 1. Paleozoique Inferieur: Masson, Paris, 689 p. (see Introduction, p. 1-14). Teslenko, Yu. V., 1969, The problem of the relationship between the general and regional stratigraphic scales (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii (L. L.Khalfin, ed.): Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 79-83, Novosibirsk. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 68-72.) Teslenko, Yu. V., 1972, Nature of the boundaries of chronostratigraphic units of the inter­ national stratigraphic scale (in Russian): Geol. Zhum., Kiev, v. 32, no. 3, p. 22-28. Teslenko, Yu. V., 1976, Principles of the stratigraphy of sedimentary formations (in Russian): Izd. “Naukova Dumka,” Kiev, 139 p. Teslenko, Yu. V., 1982, Short reference book on stratigraphic terminology (for Phanerozoic sedimentary formations) (in Russian): “Naukova Dumka,” Kiev, 157 p. Teslenko, Yu. V., 1986, On main taxonomic unit of regional stratigraphic scales (in Russian): Geol. Zhurn., Kiev, v. 46, no. 6, p. 31-35. Theobald, N., and A. Gama, 1959, Stratigraphie: Doin, Paris, 385 p. (see p. 7-24.) Thomel, G., 1973a, A propos de la zone a Actinocamax plenus: principe et application de la methodologie biostratigraphique: Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Nice, supple. H.S., t. 1, p. 1-28. Thomel, G., 1973b, De la methode en biostratigraphie: Acad. Sci., Paris, C.R., v. 277, ser. D, p. 703-706. Ting Pei-chin, 1958, Applying stratigraphic nomenclature (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 18, no. 3, p. 245-246. Ting Pei-chin, 1959, Concepts of the new stratigraphic code of China (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 9, p. 433-434. Tintant, H., 1972a, Paleontologie des invertebres et stratigraphie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, p. 33-39. Tintant, H., 1972b, La conception biologique de l'espece et son application en stratigra­ phie: in Colloque sur les methodes et tendances de la stratigraphie (Orsay, 1970), BRGM France, Mem. 77, pt. 1, p. 77-87.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 198 Bibliography

Tomlinson, C. W., 1940, Technique of stratigraphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 24, no. 11, p. 2038-2048. (Discussion by H. G. Schenck, et al., H. D. Hedberg, J. E. Eaton, and R. T. White and replies by C. W. Tomlinson: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 25, no. 12, p. 2195-2211, 1941.) Tracey, J. I., Jr., 1989, Surveying the nomenclature of geologic time: Earth Sciences History, v. 8, no. 2, p. 183-189. Trendall, A. F., 1966, Towards rationalism in Precambrian stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 13, pt. 2, p. 517-526. Troelsen, J. C., and Th. Sorgenfrei, 1956, Principeme for stratigrafisk inddeling og nomenklatur (Procedure and terminology in stratigraphic classification): Dansk Geol. Foren., Meddel. Bd. 13, H. 3, p. 145-152. Trueman, A. E., 1923, Some theoretical aspects of correlation: Geologists’ Assoc. Proc., v. 34, p. 193-206. Trtimper, E., 1969, Zu einigen Problemen des Begriffes “Leitfossil”: Deutsche Ges. Geol. Wiss., Ber., Reihe A, Geol. Palaont., v. 14, no. 3, p. 349-355. Truswell, J. F., 1967, A critical review of stratigraphic terminology as applied in South Africa: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 70, p. 81-116 (Discussion by R. V. Dingle and reply by J. F. Truswell, p. 189). Ulrich, E. O., 1911, Revision of the Paleozoic systems: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 22, p. 281-680. Ulrich, E. 0.,1916, Correlation by displacements of the strandline and the function and proper use of fossils in correlation: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 27, p. 451—490. Ulrich, E. O., 1916, Correlation by displacements of the strandline and the function and proper use of fossils in correlation: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 27, p. 451—490. Ulrich, E. O., 1953, Stratigraphic nomenclature in reports of the U.S. Geological Survey: U.S. Geol. Survey, 54 p. USSR Commission for Stratigraphic Classification, Terminology and Nomenclature, 1977, Report 5, Discussion of the project Stratigraphic Code of the USSR (in Russian): in Resolutions of the Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee, vyp. 17, p. 66-70. Vail, P. R., et al., 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 49-212. Vail, P. R., and R. M. Mitchum, Jr., 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 1: Overview: in Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 1: Overview: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 51-52. Vail, P. R., R. M. Mitchum, Jr., and S. Thompson III, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 3: Relative changes of sea level from coastal onlap: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 63-81. Vail, P. R., R. M., Mitchum, Jr., and S. Thompson III, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 4: Global cycles of relative changes of sea level: in Seismic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 83-97. Vail, P. R., R. G. Todd, and J. B. Sangree, 1977, Seismic stratigraphy and global changes of sea level, Part 5: Chronostratigraphic significance of seismic reflections: in Seis­ mic stratigraphy— applications to hydrocarbon exploration (C. E. Payton, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Memoir 26, p. 99-116.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 199

Valentine, J. W., 1963, Biogeographic units as biostratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petro­ leum Geol. Bull., v. 47, no. 3, p. 457-466. Valentine, K. W. G., 1977, Biogeography and biostratigraphy: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 143-162. Valentine, K. W. G., and J. B. Dalrymple, 1976, Quaternary buried paleosols: A critical review: Quaternary Research, v. 6, no. 2, p. 209-222. Van Andel, Tj. H., 1981, Consider the incompleteness of the geological record: Nature, v. 294, p. 397-398. Van Couvering, J. A., and W. A. Berggren, 1977, Biostratigraphic basis of the Neogene time scale: in Concepts and methods of biostratigraphy (E. G. Kauffman and J. E. Hazel, eds.): Dowden, Hutchison & Ross, Stroudsburg, Pa., p. 283-306. Van Hinte, J. E., 1968, On the Stage: Geol. en Mijnbouw, v. 47, no. 5, p. 311-315. Van Hinte, J. E., 1969, The nature of biostratigraphic zones: 1st Int. Conf. on Planktonic Microfossils (Geneva, 1967) Proc. (P. Bronnimann and H. H. Renz, eds.), v. 2, p. 267-272. Van Hinte, J. E., 1976a, A Jurassic time scale: Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 60, no. 4, p. 489^197. Van Hinte, J. E., 1976b, A Cretaceous time scale: Amer. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 60, no. 4, p. 498-516. Van Hinte, J. E., 1977, Review of International Stratigraphic Guide: Marine Micro­ paleontology, v. 2, no. 2, p. 201-205. Van Hinte, J. E., 1978, On boundary stratotypes, discussion: Marine Micropaleontology, v. 3, no. 2, p. 197-198. (Reply by W. A. Berggren, B. U. Haq, and J. A. Van- Couvering, p. 198-200.) van Morkhoven, F. P. C. M., 1966, The concept of paleoecology and its practical applica­ tion: Gulf Coast Assoc, of Geol. Soc. Trans., v. 16, p. 305-313. Van Wagoner, J. C., 1985, Reservoir facies distribution as controlled by sea-level change (abstr.): Soc. Econ. Paleont. and Mineralog. Annual Midyear Meeting (Golden, Colorado, Aug. 1985), p. 91-92. Van Wagoner, J. C., R. M. Mitchum, Jr., H. W. Posamentier, and P. R. Vail, 1987, Seismic stratigraphic interpretation using sequence stratigraphy, Pt. 2— Key defini­ tions of sequence stratigraphy: in Atlas of seismic stratigraphy (A. W. Bally, ed.): Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Studies in Geology 27, v. 1, p. 11-14. Van Wagoner, J. C., et al., 1988, An overview of the fundamentals of sequence stratigra­ phy and key definitions: in Sea-level changes: an integrated approach (C. K. Wilgus et al., eds.): Soc. Econ. Paleont. and Mineralogists Spec. Publ. 42, p. 39^15. Van Wagoner, J. C., R. M. Mitchum, K. M. Campion, and V. D. Rahmanian, 1990, sequence stratigraphy in well logs, cores, and : concepts of high-resolution correlation of time and facies: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Methods in Exploration Series no. 7, 55 p. Vella, P., 1962, Biostratigraphy and paleoecology of Mauriceville District, New Zealand: Royal Soc. New Zealand Geol. Trans., v. 1, no. 12, p. 183-199. Vella, P., 1964, Biostratigraphic units: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 7, no. 3, p. 615-625. Vella, P., 1965, Sedimentary cycles, correlation, and stratigraphic classification: Royal Soc. New Zealand Geol. Trans., v. 3, no. 1, p. 1-9. Vera, J. A., O. Riba, and S. Reguant, 1989, Glosario de terminos relacionados con el analisis de cuencas: in Division de unidades estratigraficas en el analisis de cuencas (J. A. Vera, ed.): Soc. Geol. Espana Revista, v. 2, nos. 2-3, p. 381 —401.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 200 Bibliography

Vereshchagin, V. N., 1980, Suite— the major stratigraphic unit (in Russian): in Strati­ graphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 130-135. Verwoerd, W. J., 1964, Stratigraphic classification: a critical review: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans, and Proc., v. 67, p. 263-282. (Discussions by A. R. Newton, J. F. Truswell, H. de la R. Winter, O. H. Schindewolf, and H. D. Hedberg, and replies by W. J. Verwoerd, p. 313-316). Wagenbreth, O., 1965, Uber Unscharfebeziehungen in der Geologie: Wiss. Zeitschr. Humboldt Univ., 4/5, p. 686-692. Wagenbreth, O., 1966, Bemerkungen zum Zeitbegriff in der historischen Geologie und zur Frage einer Unscharfebeziehung bei rhythmischer oder zyklischer Schich- tengliederung: Wiss. Zeitschr. Hochsch. Architektur Bauw. Weimar, Jahrg 13, no. 6, p. 617-625. Wager, L. R., 1964, The history of attempts to establish a quantitative time-scale: in The Phanerozoic time-scale (W. B. Harland, A. G. Smith, and B. Wilcock, eds.): Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 120s, p. 13-28. Walcott, C. D., 1893, Geologic time as indicated by the sedimentary rocks of North America: Jour. Geol., v. 1, no. 7, p. 639-676. Walliser, O. H., 1966, Die Silur/Devon-Grenze—Ein Beispiel biostratigraphischer Methodik: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Abh., v. 125, p. 235-246. Wang Chao-Siang, 1964, In defense of traditional stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. China Proc., no. 7, p. 40—47. Wang Chao-Siang, 1973, Stratigraphic classification and terminology: an actualistic ap­ praisal and proposal: Geol.Rundsch., v. 62, no. 3, p. 947-958. Wang Hong, 1966, On rock-stratigraphic units (in Chinese with English abstract): Acta Geol. Sinica, v. 46, no. 1, p. 1-13. Wang Hong-zhen, 1980, Stratigraphic systems and geologic time (in Chinese): in Text book of historical geology (Wang Hong-zhen and Liu Ben-pei, eds.): Geol. Publ. House, Beijing, p. 721. Wang Hong-zhen, 1989, Classification and disciplinary branches of stratigraphy (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 35, no. 3, p. 271-276. Wang Hong-zhen, 1992, On the use of Sinian from the viewpoint of stratigraphic nomen­ clature and the chronostratigraphic classification of the Precambrian of China (in Chinese): Jour. Stratigraphy, v. 6, no. 4, p. 241-246. Wang Qiang, 1992, Some problems on Chinese Quaternary (in Chinese with English ab­ stract): Marine Geol. and Quaternary Geol., v. 12, no. 3, p. 87-94. Wang Yue-lun, 1958, How to classify stratigraphic units (in Chinese): Geol. Publ. House, Beijing. Waterhouse, J. B., 1966, Time in stratigraphy: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 9, p. 541-544. (Discussion by G. H. Scott: New Zealand Jour. Geol. Geophys., v. 10, p. 300-301, 1967.) Waterhouse, J. B., 1976, The significance of ecostratigraphy and need for biostratigraphic hierarchy in stratigraphic nomenclature: Lethaia, v. 9, no. 3, p. 317-325. Watkins, N. D., 1972, Review of the development of the geomagnetic polarity time scale and discussion of prospects for its finer definition: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 83, no. 3, p. 551-574. Watkins, N. D. (convener), 1973, Magnetic polarity time scale: Geotimes, v. 18, no. 5, p. 21-22. Watson, R. A., 1983, A critique chronostratigraphy: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 283, p. 173-177. (Discussion by S. G. Lucas and reply by R. A. Watson: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 285, p. 764-767, 1985.)

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 201

Watson, R. A., and H. E. Wright, Jr., 1980, The end of the Pleistocene: a general critique of chronostratigraphic classification: Boreas, v. 9, p. 153-163. Wedekind, R., 1916, Uber die Grundlagen und Methoden der Biostratigraphie: Born- traeger, Berlin, 60 p. Wedekind, 1918, Uber Zonenfolge und Schichtenfolge: Zent. ralbl.. Min. Gel. Palaont., Jahrg. 1918, p. 268-283. Wegmann, E., 1962-1963, L'expose original de la notion de facies par A. Gressley (1814-1865): Sciences de la Terre, t. 9, no. 1, p. 83-119. Weller, J. M., 1958, Stratigraphic facies differentiation and nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 3, pt. 1, p. 609-639. Weller, J. M., 1960, Stratigraphic principles and practice: Harper and Bros., New York, 725 p. (see p. 32-48.) Wells, J. W., 1944, Middle Devonian bone beds of Ohio: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 55, no. 3, p. 273-302. Wells, J. W., 1947, Provisional paleoecological analysis of the Devonian rocks of the Columbus region: Ohio Jour. Sci., v. 47, p. 119-126. Wells, J. W., 1963, Coral growth and geochronometry: Nature, v. 197, no. 4871, p. 948-950. Wengerd, S. A., 1971 (1969), Chronostratigraphic analysis and the time surface: Soc. Geol. Mexicana Bol., v. 32, no. 1, p. 1-13. Westoll, T. S., et al., 1971, The Silurian-Devonian boundary: Geol. Soc. London Jour., v. 127, pt. 3, p. 285-288. Wezel, F. C., 1975, Diachronism of depositional and diastrophic events: Nature, v. 253, no. 5489, p. 255-257. Wheeler, H. E., 1958a, Primary factors in biostratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 3, pt. 1, p. 640-655. Wheeler, H. E., 1958b, Time-stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 42, no. 5, p. 1047-1063. Wheeler, H. E., 1959a, Note 24 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)— Unconformity-bounded units in stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 43, no. 8, p. 1975-1977. Wheeler, H. E., 1959b, Stratigraphic units in space and time: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 692-706. Wheeler, H. E., 1963, Post-Sauk and Pre-Absaroka Paleozoic stratigraphic patterns in North America: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v.47, no. 8, p. 1497-1526. Wheeler, H. E., 1964, Baselevel, lithosphere surface, and time stratigraphy: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 75, no. 7, p. 599-610. Wheeler, H. E., and E. M. Beesley, 1948, Critique of the time-stratigraphic concept: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 1, p. 75-86. Wheeler, H. E., et al., 1950, Stratigraphic classification: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 34, no. 12, p. 2361-2365. Wheeler, H. E., and V. S. Mallory, 1953, Designation of stratigraphic units: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 37, no. 10, p. 2407-2421. (Discussion by A. G. Fisher and reply by H. E. Wheeler and V. S. Mallory, Arbitrary cut-off in stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., v. 38, no. 5, p. 926-931, 1954.) Wheeler, H. E., and V. S. Mallory, 1954, Analysis and classification of stratigraphic units (abstr.): Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 65, no. 12, p. 2, p. 1324. Wheeler, H. E., and V. S. Mallory, 1956, Factors in lithostratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 40, no. 11, p. 2711-2723. (Comments by J. R. Patterson and T. P. Storey: Lithologic versus stratigraphic concepts: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 41, no. 9, p. 2139-2142, 1957.)

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 202 Bibliography

Whitaker, J. H, M., 1962, Diskussion zur Silur/Devon-Grenze: Symposium Silur/Devon- Grenze (Bonn-Bruxelles, 1960) (H. K. Erben, ed.), p. 310-311. Wickman, F. E., 1948, Isotope ratios: a clue to the age of certain marine sediments: Jour. Geol., v. 56, no. 1, p. 61-66. Wieczorek, J., 1988, Principles of Polish stratigraphic classification— a critique evalua­ tion (in Polish): Przegl. geol., v. 36, no. 2, p. 98-102. Wiedmann, J., 1967, Die Jura/Kreide-Grenze und Fragen stratigraphischer Nomenklatur: Neues Jahrb. Geol. Palaont., Monatsh., v. 12, p. 736-746. Wiedmann, J., 1968, Das Problem stratigraphischer Grenzziehung und die Jura/Kreide- Grenze: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 61, no. 2, p. 321-386. (Discussion by H. D. Hedberg: Eclog. Geol. Helv., v. 63, no. 2, p. 673-684.) Wiedmann, J., 1970, Problems of stratigraphic classification and the definition of strati­ graphic boundaries: Newsl. Stratigr., v. 1, no. 1, p. 35-48. Wiedmann, J., 1971, Die Jura/Kreide-Grenze Prioritaten, Diastrophen oder Faunen- wende?: Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 333-338. Wilgus, C. K., et al. (eds.), 1988, Sea-level changes: an integrated approach: Soc. Eco­ nomic Paleont. Mineralogists Special Publ. 42, 407 p. Williams, H. S., 1893a, The making of the geological time scale: Jour. Geol., v. 1, no. 2, p. 180-197. Williams, H. S., 1893b, The elements of the geological time scale: Jour. Geol., v. 1, no. 3, p.283-295. Williams, H. S., 1894, Dual nomenclature in geological classification: Jour. Geol., v. 2, no. 2, p. 145-160. Williams, H. S., 1895, Geological biology: Holt, New York, 395 p. (see p. 1-77.) Williams, H. S., 1898, The classification of stratified rocks: Jour. Geol., v. 6, no. 7, p. 671-678. Williams, H. S., 1901, The discrimination of time-values in geology: Jour. Geol., v. 9, no. 7, p. 570-585. Williams, H. S., 1903, The correlation of geological faunas: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 210, 147 p. Williams, H. S., 1905, Bearing of some new paleontologic facts on nomenclature and classification of sedimentary formations: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 16, no. 2, p. 137-150. Williams, J. S., 1954, Problem of boundaries between geologic systems: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 38, no. 7, p. 1602-1605. Williams, J. S., and A. T. Cross, 1952, Note 13 (of Am. Com. Strat. Nomen.)—Third Congress of Carboniferous stratigraphy and geology: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 36, no. 1, p. 169-172. Willis, B., 1901, Individuals of stratigraphic classification: Jour. Geol., v. 9, no. 7, p. 557-569. Willman, H. B., D. H. Swann, and J. C. Frye, 1958, Stratigraphic policy of the Illinois State Geological Survey: Illinois State Geol. Survey, Circular 249, 14 p. Wilmarth, M. G., 1925, The geologic time classification of the United States Geological Survey compared with other classifications; accompanied by the original definition of era, period, and epoch terms: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 769, 138 p. Wilson, J. A., 1959, Stratigraphic concepts in vertebrate paleontology: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 257, no. 10, p. 770-778. Wilson, J. A., 1960, Stratigraphic practice in North American vertebrate paleontology: 21st Int. Geol. Congress (Norden, 1960), pt. 22, p. 102-110.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 203

Wilson, J. A., 1971, Stratigraphy and classification: Abh. hess. L.-Amt Bodenforsch, H. 60, Heinz Tobien Festschrift, p. 195-202. Winder, C. G., 1959, Contacts of sedimentary formations—a resume: Alberta Soc. Petroleum Geol. Jour., v. 7, no. 7, p. 149—156. Woodford, A. O., 1963, Correlation by fossils: in The of geology (C. C. Albritton, Jr., ed.), Addison-Wesley, New York, p. 75-111. Woodford, A. O., 1965, Historical geology: W. H. Freeman, San Francisco and London, 512 p. (seep . 153-190.) Woodring, W. P., 1953, Stratigraphic classification and nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol. Bull., v. 37, no. 5, p. 1081-1083. Woodward, H. B., 1892, On geological zones: Geol. Assoc. Proc., v. 12, p. 295-315. Woodward, H. B., 1907, The history of the Geological Society of London: Geological Soc., London, 336 p. (see p. 18-24 on recommendations in 1808 for uniformity in geological nomenclature.) Woodward, H. P., 1929a, Standardization of geologic time-units: Pan-Am. Geol., v. 51, no. 1, p. 15-22. Woodward, H. P., 1929b, Priority in stratigraphic nomenclature: Science, n.s., v. 70, no. 1804, p. 96-97. Xiao Jin-dong, 1987, My humble opinion about the lithostratigraphic unit “formation” in recent Stratigraphic Guide of China (in Chinese): Information of Geol. Sci. and Technol., Wuhan College of Geology, v. 6, no. 3, p. 27-32. Xie Xian-ming, 1959, Some considerations in connection with geochronologic and strati­ graphic units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 10, p. 482-483. Yang Hong-da, 1957, Subdivision of rock strata and method of correlation (in Chinese): Geol. Publ. House, Beijing, 86 p. Yarkin, V. I., 1980, Stratigraphic units and Stratigraphic Code (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 69-76. Yarkin, V. I., A. I. Zhamoida, et al., 1971, Principal provisions of the project for a Stratigraphic Code in the USSR (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 7, p. 47-55. Yin Zan-xun, 1960, Explanatory notes on the project of Stratigraphic Code of China (in Chinese): in All China Stratigraphic Commission, Project of a Stratigraphic Code and its explanation: Sci. Press, Beijing, p. 8-33. Yin Zan-xun, 1966, Delimitation and naming of the largest units in the history of the earth (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 24, no. 1, p. 51-52. York, D., and R. M. Farquhar, 1972, The Earth’s age and geochronology: Pergamon Press, Elsmford, New York, 197 p. Young, K., 1960, Biostratigraphy and the new paleontology: Jour. Paleontology, v. 34, no. 2, p. 347-358. Yu Jian-hua, and Fang Yi-ting, 1982, Some opinions on the second draft of the Strati­ graphic Code of China (in Chinese): Jour. Stratigraphy, v. 6, no. 1, p. 82-84. Yuan E-rong, 1990, A discussion of the stratigraphic characteristics and stratigraphic unit of low-grade metamorphic rock terrains (in Chinese with English abstract): Earth Sci. Jour., China Univ. Geosciences, v. 15, no. 2, p. 137-144. Yuferev, O. V., 1969, Paleobiogeographic belts and subdivisions of the stage scale (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 5, p. 77-84. (English translation in Int. Geol. Review, v. 12, no. 5, p. 560-566.) Yuferev, O. V., 1976, On zonal subdivision belts in biostratigraphy (in Russian): in XXV JGC, Dovlady Sovetsk. Geologov. Paleontologiya. Morskaya Geologiya.: “Nauka,” M oscow, p. 24-31.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 204 Bibliography

Zagwijn, W. H., 1957, Vegetation, climate, and time-correlations in the of Europe: Geol. Mijnbouw, n. ser., Jaarg. 19, p. 233-244. Zaltsman, I. G., 1973, The basic unit of a regional stratigraphic scale (in Russian): in Problemy Stratigrafii: Trudy, SNIGGIMS, vyp. 169, p. 61-68. Zeiss, A., 1968 (1967), Untersuchungen zur Palaontologie der Cephalopoden des Unter- Tithon der Siidlichen Frankenalb: Bayerische Akad. Wiss., Math.-Naturw. Kl., Abh. Neue Folge, v. 132, 190 p. (see particularly p. 127-133.) Zentrales Geologisches Institut der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik (ed.), 1968, Grundriss der Geologie der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik, Band 1 Geo- logische Entwicklung des Gesamtgebietes: Akad. Verlag, Berlin, 454 p. Zeuner, F. E., 1952, Dating the past: an introduction to geochronology, 3rd revised ed.: Methuen and Co. Ltd., London, 495 p. Zhamoida, A. I. (ed.), 1965, Stratigraphic classification, terminology, and nomenclature: “Nedra,” Leningrad, 70 p. (English translation in Int. Geol. Review, v. 8, no. 10, pt. 2, 1966, p. 1144-1150.) Zhamoida, A. I., 1969, Principal problems of stratigraphic classification, terminology and nomenclature (in Russian): in Geologicheskoe stroenie SSSR, t. 5, Izd.: “Nedra,” Leningrad, p. 21-36. Zhamoida, A. I., 1977, Notes on the theory of stratigraphy (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 8, p. 151-156. Zhamoida, A. I., 1979, The significance of the geographical criterion in stratigraphic classification (to the publication of the “Stratigraphic Code of the USSR”) (in Russian): Records of the Leningrad Inst, of Mines, vol. 81, p. 11-19. Zhamoida, A. I., 1980, Characteristic features and relations between major stratigraphic units (in Russian): in Stratigraphic classification—Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 23-63. Zhamoida, A. I., 1984, Comparing the Soviet Stratigraphic Code with the International Guide: Episodes, v. 7, no. 1, p. 9-11. Zhamoida, A. I., 1988, On the characteristic of zonal biostratigraphic units (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 11, p. 27-33. Zhamoida, A. I., 1989, On the preparation of the second edition of the Stratigraphic Code of the USSR. Basic principles of the Project (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 2, p. 49-56. Zhamoida, A. I., O. P. Kovalevskiy, and A. I. Moiseyeva, 1969, A survey of foreign strat­ igraphic codes (in Russian): Interdepartmental Strat. Comm. USSR, Trans., v. 1, 103 p., Moscow. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, 72 p.) Zhamoida, A. I., O. P. Kovalevskiy, A. I. Moiseyeva, and V. I. Yarkin, 1973, Principal controversial problems of the project for a Stratigraphic Code for the USSR (sum­ mary of comments) (in Russian): Interdepartmental Strat. Comm. USSR, no. 13, p. 42-56. Zhamoida, A. I., O. P. Kovalevskiy, A. I. Moiseyeva, and V. I. Yarkin (compilers), 1974, Project of a Stratigraphic Code for the USSR: second version (in Russian): VSEGEI, Interdepartmental Strat. Comm. USSR, 40 p. Zhamoida, A. I., and V. V. Menner, 1974, Two fundamental principles of stratigraphic classification (in Russian): in Problemy geologii i poleznykh iskopaemykh na XXIV sessii Mezhdunarodnogo geologicheskogo kongyessa, USSR Acad. Sci., Moscow, p. 144-151.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Bibliography 205

Zhamoida, A. I., and A. I. Moiseyeva, 1980, International Stratigraphic Guide and Strati­ graphic Code of the USSR— similarities and differences (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 1, p. 55-65. Zhamoida, A. I., and A. I. Moiseyeva, 1986, On activity of International Commission on Stratigraphic Classification (1976-1986) (in Russian): Izv.USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 12, p. 115-119. Zhang Hong-zhao, 1955, Developmental history of Chinese geology, 2nd ed. (in Chi­ nese): Commerce Business Press, Shanghai, 149 p. Zhang Jia-qi, 1959, A new variant of nomenclatural rules for regional stratigraphic units (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 9, p. 432^133. Zhang Shou-xin, 1975, Formation: its meaning and usage (in Chinese with English ab­ stract): Scientia Geologica Sinica, no. 3, p. 285-292. Zhang Shou-xin, 1979, The evolving conception of the stratigraphic classification and the revision of the Stratigraphic Code of China (in Chinese): Acta Stratigraphica Sinica, v. 3, no. 2, p. 103-112. Zhang Shou-xin, 1981, A brief introduction to the Stratigraphic Guide of China: Scientia Geologica Sinica, no. 4, p. 411—412. Zhang Shou-xin, 1985, The principles of stratigraphic classification and nomenclature of sequences: in Liu Tung-sheng et al., Loess and the environment: China Ocean Press, Beijing, p. 227-230. Zhang Shou-xin, 1986, Concepts of modem stratigraphy (in Chinese): Zhongguo Dizhi (Chinese Geology), no. 10, p. 12-13. Zhang Shou-xin, 1987, Accurate dating of geological time and the geological event (in Chinese): in The trends of geological science of the present age (Zhang Bin-xi, ed.): Geol. Publishing House, Beijing, p. 3-7. Zhang Shou-xin, 1989a, Theoretical stratigraphy— the concepts of modern stratigraphy (in Chinese): Science Press, Beijing, 165 p. Zhang Shou-xin, 1989b, The theory and practice of stratigraphy (in Chinese): in Modern stratigraphy (Wu Ri-tang and Zhang Shou-xin, eds.): China Univ. Geosciences Press, Wuhan, p. 196-213. Zhang Shou-xin, and Wu Ri-tang, 1991, The east European and the Western stratigraphic codes and their influence upon Chinese stratigraphic works: Interchange of geosci­ ence ideas between the East and West: XVth International Symposium of INHIGEO Proc., p. 181-188. Zhao Yi-yang, 1959, Unification of stratigraphic terminology (in Chinese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 19, no. 5, p. 229-230. Zhao Zong-fu, 1948, Some concepts on the usage of Chinese stratigraphic terms (in Chi­ nese): Dizhi Lunping (Geol. Review), v. 13, nos. 1-2, p. 83-93. Zhizhchenko, B. P., 1972, A complex approach to the problem of stratigraphy of Ceno­ zoic deposits (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 2, p. 41-57. Zhou Wen-fu, 1964, Some problems of the “project of a unified stratigraphic scheme” (in Chinese): Kexue Tongbao, no. 4, p. 364. Zhuang Shou-qiang, 1988, Relativism of time and synchroneity of a biozone (in Chi­ nese): Jiangsu Geology, no. 4, p. 19-22. Zhuang Shou-qiang, 1990, Discussion about some questions in the Chinese Stratigraphic Guide (in Chinese with English abstract): Jour. China Univ. Mining and Technology, v. 19, no. 1, p. 92-97. Ziegler, B., 1971, Grenzen der Biostratigraphie im Jura und Gedanken zur stratigraphis- chen Methodik: Colloque du Jurassique (Luxembourg, 1967), BRGM France, Mem. 75, p. 35-67.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 206 Bibliography

Zinov’ev, M. S., E. E. M igacheva, and B. P. Sterlin, 1965, On volume, principles o f es­ tablishment of zones and their correlation (in Russian): Sov. Geol., no. 5, p. 11-17. Zubakov, V. A., 1964, The critical survey of question on taxonomic rank of the Qua­ ternary deposits (in Russian): Trudy, VSEGEI, v. 102, p. 80-103. Zubakov, V. A., 1967, Paleontologic criteria of volume and rank of stratigraphic subdivi­ sions: Int. Geol. Rev., v. 9, no. 11, p. 1415-1422. (Review-translation of Trans, of 8th session, All-Union Paleontological Soc. in 1962: “Nedra,” Moscow, 1966.) Zubakov, V. A., 1969a, Controversial problems of stratigraphic classification and termi­ nology (in Russian): in Problemy Statigrafii (L. L. Khalfin, ed.); Trudy, SNIGGIMS, no. 94, p. 43-65. (English translation by Israel Program for Scientific Translations as Classification in Stratigraphy, Jerusalem, 1971, for U.S. Dept, of Int. and Nat. Sci. Foundation, p. 35-55.) Zubakov, V. A., 1969b, Chronostratigraphic classification of the climatostratigraphic units (in Russian): Izv. USSR Acad. Sci., ser. geol., no. 1, p. 149-152. Zubakov, V. A., 1978, Rhythmostratigraphic units— A project of additions to the Strati­ graphic Code of the USSR (in Russian): VSEGEI, Leningrad, 72 p. Zubakov, V. A., 1980, On a complete stratigraphic classification (in Russian): in Strati­ graphic classification— Materials for the problem: “Nauka,” Leningrad, p. 90-115. Zubakov, V. A., 1982, "Zveno” as a least unit of the general stratigraphic scale (with ex­ ample from Pliocene (in Russian): in Present day meaning of paleontology for stra­ tigraphy: 24th Session of All-Union Paleontological Society (Leningrad) Proc., p. 33^13.

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Index

abundance zone, 10 (Table 1), 57, assignm ent 63-64, 64 (Fig. 11) conventions for, 22 boundaries, 64 uncertainty of, 22 definition of, 63-64 auxiliary reference section, 37. See also name, 64 hypostratotype acme zone, 64 acrozone, 57 bands, 565 age, 10 (Table 1), 25, 78-79, 79 barren intervals, definition of, 56 (Table 3) bed, 10 (Table 1), 34 definition of, 79 bentonite, 78 determination by radioactivity, 95 definition of, 33, 34-35 algal reefs, 99 distinctive, 34-35 alloformation, 50 sequence of, 92 allogroup, 50 trace of, 92 allomember, 50 bentonite beds, from volcanic ash falls, allostratigraphic unit, 50 78 angular unconformity, definition of, biocoenosis, 54 4 8 biocorrelation, definition of, 15. angularity, 48 See also biostratigraphic correlation anom alies biofacies, 16 magnetic-polarity, 72 biohorizon, 56, 57, 78, 91. See also marine magnetic, 72 biostratigraphic horizon anomaly numbers, 70 biostratigraphic classification, 99 apparent polar wander, 69 definition of, 55 apparent polar wander path (APWP), biostratigraphic correlation, 65-66 7 0 biostratigraphic horizon, 56, 59. S ee aquifers, 36 also biohorizon arbitrary cutoff, 38 biostratigraphic range zone, 25, 84 arbitrary lateral boundary, 38 biostratigraphic units, 8 (Fig. 1), 9, Archean, 83, 87 5 3 -6 7 , 100 assemblage zone, 10 (Table 1), 57, 62 definition of, 8 (Fig. 10), 62-63 hierarchy of, 64—65 boundaries of, 63 kinds of, 56-64 definition of, 62-63 naming of, 66 name, 63 procedures for establishing, 65

207

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 208 Index

biostratigraphic unit (continued) chronostratigraphic unit (continued) procedures for extending, 65-66 procedures for establishing, 88 revision of, 67 revision of, 98 biostratigraphic zone, 55, 61. See also chronostratigraphic zones, 61 b iozon e chronostratigraphy, 77, 99, 102 biostratigraphy, 100, 102 definition of, 77 definition of, 55 chronozone, 61, 74 (Table 2), 83-85 biozone, 8 (Fig. 1), 10 (Table 1), 47 compared to biozone, 83 (Fig. 13) (Fig. 4), 53, 93. See also definition of, 83 biostratigraphic zone geographic extent of, 84 compared to chronozone, 83 (Fig. 13) name of, 84—85 boundaries, 38, 56 time span of, 83-84 arbitrary lateral, 38 coal beds, 32 (Fig. 3), 78, 99 horizontal, 38 coal seams, 36 vertical, 38 com plex boundary-stratotype, 25, 26, 27 (Fig. 2), definition of, 36 29, 37, 72, 80-81, 89 (Fig. 14) use of term, 42 of chronostratigraphic units, 87-91 component-stratotype, definition of, 26 definition of, 26 composite-stratotype, 26, 37 lower, 72 definition of, 26 marine, 91 concurrent-range zone, 59 (Fig. 6), 84 o f a stage, 79 boundaries of, 58 upper, 72 definition of, 58 bounding unconformities, 46 name of, 58 , 37 (Fig. 3) Cenozoic, 82 , 99 cenozone, 63 correlation, definition of, 15. See also chron, 74 (Table 2), 83, 85 biocorrelation, chronocorrelation, chronocorrelation, 91, 92-97 lithocorrelation definition of, 15 chronohorizon, 101. See a lso dating, isotopic, 88, 92, 94-95 chronostratigraphic horizon datum level, 56 chronostratigraphic classification, 77- datum plane, 56 78, 102-103 datums, 56. See also chronostratigraphic definition of, 77 horizon goal of, 85 definitions, 13-24. See also glossary chronostratigraphic correlation, 15, biostratigraphy, 55-56 9 2 - 9 7 chronostratigraphy, 77-78 chronostratigraphic equivalents of magnetostratigraphy, 70-71 magnetostratigraphic polarity units, standard, 25 74 (Table 2), 75 (Fig. 12) stratotypes, 26-28 chronostratigraphic horizon, 78, 94 unconformity-bounded units, 46, 48 (Fig. 15), 101 depositories, 19 definition of, 78 diastem, definition of, 48 chronostratigraphic unit, 9-11, 27 dipole-field-pole position, 69 (Fig. 2), 77-98, 101-102 disconformity, 38 definition of, 8, 77, 78 definition of, 48 kinds of, 78-85 distinctive bed, 34-35 naming of, 97-98 distribution of rock bodies, 13

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Index 209

electrical logs, 19, 39, 78, 92 74 (Table 2), 75 (Fig. 12) environment of deposition, 16 geochronologic unit, 9-11, 77 eon, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), 83, 86 definition of, 16 (Table 4), 87 geochronology, definition of, 16 eonothem, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), geochronometry, definition of, 16 83, 86 (Table 4) geographic description, 29 epoch, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), 81, 86 geographic names (Table 4) changes in, 21 definition of, 80 duplication of, 21 era, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), 82, 86 inappropriate, 21 (Table 4) of stratigraphic units, 20-21 erathem, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), 82, spelling of, 20 86 (Table 4) geologic age, 18 definition of, 81 geologic description, 29 erosion, 48 geologic logs, 19 eustatic sea level changes, 96 geologic-time terms, 74 evaporites, 32 (Fig. 3) geomagnetic polarity reversals, 95-96 evolutionary zone, 62 geomorphic expression, 39 geophysical logs, 19 facies, definition of, 16 geophysical properties, of rock bodies, first appearance datums (FADs), 56 13 fission tracks, 97 geophysical unit, 8 (Fig. 1) flood zone, 64 Global Boundary Stratotype Section and flow, 10 (Table 1) Point (GSSP), 29, 79, 90, 91 definition of, 33, 35 Global Chronostratigraphic Scale, 29 folding, 48 glossary, 105-142 formal terminology, 14, 33, 36 group, 10 (Table 1) formation, 8 (Fig. 1), 10 (Table 1), 27 definition of, 33, 35 (Fig. 2), 35, 47 (Fig. 4) definition of, 33-34 heavy-mineral assemblages, detrital, 97 fossils, 53, 54-55, 63, 93-94 hiatuses, 38-39 content in rocks, 8, 13, 25, 38, 65, highest-occurrence zone, 59, 60 (Fig. 8) 91, 99, 100 holostratotype, 19, 26 distinctive, 39 definition of, 27-28 distribution of, 92 horizon, 56 from Phanerozoic, 102 definition of, 15 in relation to recognition of hypostratotype, 18. See also auxiliary lithostratigraphic units, 32 reference section, principal reference indigenous, 54 section infiltrated, 55 definition of, 28 introduced, 55 names, 66 igneous bodies reworked, 54 intrusive, 41 value of, 54 requirements for type localities of, 30 igneous rocks, 37 (Fig. 3), 41—43 geochemical properties of rock bodies, classification of, 3 13 nomenclature of, 3 geochronologic equivalents of indexes, 56 magnetostratigraphic polarity units, industrial lithostratigraphic unit, 36

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 210 Index

informal stratigraphic unit, 14 last-occurrence zone, 59 informal lithostratigraphic unit, 36 lateral intergradation, 38 instant, 78 lateral traceability, 38 intergrading, 38 Law of Superposition of Strata, 92 International Code of Botanical lectostratotype, definition of, 28 Nomenclature, 66, 67 lens, definition of, 34 International Code of Zoological lenticle. See lens Nomenclature, 66, 67 lentil. See lens International Commission on levels, 56. See also chronostratigraphic Stratigraphy of IUGS, 1, 82, 85, 90, horizon 91 Lexique Stratigraphique International, International Geological Congress, 1 1 9 -2 0 International Stratigraphic Guide, 61, limestone, 37 (Fig. 3) 64, 85, 105 lim its, 56 origin of, 1-2 lineage age, 62 preparation of, 3-4 lineage zone, 10 (Table 1), 57, 61 purposes of, 1-2, 4 (Fig. 9) revision of, 3-4 boundaries of, 62 spirit of, 4 definition of, 61 International Subcommission on lithocorrelation. See lithologic Stratigraphic Classification (ISSC), correlation 1, 105 Iithofacies, 16 alternative or dissenting views, 5 lithogenetic evidence, 39 composition of, 2-3 lithogenetic terms, 41 goal of, 4 lithohorizon. See lithostratigraphic International Subcommission on horizon Stratigraphic Terminology (ISST), 1 lithologic composition of rock bodies, International Union of Geological 13 Sciences (IUGS), 1 lithologic correlation, definition of, 15 intertonguing, 38 lithologic logs, 19 complex, 38 lithology, 25, 92-93 interval zone, 10 (Table 1), 57, 60 lithostratigraphic classification, (Figs. 7, 8) definition of, 31 boundaries of, 60 lithostratigraphic correlation, 15, 39 definition of, 59 lithostratigraphic horizon, 102 names of, 60 definition of, 36 invertebrates, as indicators of lithostratigraphic unit, 9, 27 (Fig. 2), chronostratigraphic position, 97 31-43, 47 (Fig. 4), 84, 99, 102 isochroneity, 92 boundaries of, 39 isotopic dating, 88, 92, 94—95 definition of, 8, 31-33 formal, 33 key bed. See chronostratigraphic fossil content of, 99 horizon, distinctive bed identification of, 39 key horizon, 56. See also informal, 36 chronostratigraphic horizon interrelations of, 32 (Fig. 3) kinds of, 33-36 lamina, definition of, 34 naming of, 39-43 land mass movements, epeirogenic, 96 nature of, 31 last appearance datums (LADs), 56 procedures for establishing, 36

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Index 211

lithostratigraphic unit (continued) magnetostratigraphy, definition of, 70 procedures for extending, 39 magnetozone. See magnetostratigraphic revision of, 43 unit stratigraphic relations of, 32 (Fig. 3) marker, 56. See also chronostratigraphic lithostratigraphic zone, 36 horizon lithostratigraphy, 100 marker bed, 34-35, 39, 78. See also definition of, 31 chronostratigraphic horizon, lithozone, 36 distinctive bed local-range zone, 58 marker horizon, 78. See also local time relations, 77 chronostratigraphic horizon lower boundary-stratotype, 72 melange, use of term, 42 lowest-occurrence zone, 59 member, 8 (Fig. 1), 10 (Table 1) definition of, 33, 34 magnetic anomalies, marine, 70, 72 Mesozoic, 82 magnetic field metamorphic rocks, 32 (Fig. 3), 41-43 intensity, 69 classification of, 3 reversals in polarity, 69 nomenclature of, 3 magnetic polarity, 25 nonlayered, 41 magnetic-polarity anomalies, from the requirements for type localities of, 30 ocean floor, 72 microfossils, 54, 55 magnetic-polarity reversal, 91 mine, designation of, 19 horizons of, 78, 101 moment, 78 magnetic-polarity scale, 95-96 morphogenetic zone, 62 magnetic properties of rocks, 69 magnetic susceptibility, 69 names magnetization abandoned, 22 normal, 69 change of geographic term of, 43 remanent, 69, 71 change of lithologic term of, 43 reversed, 69 change of rank of, 43 magnetospheric polarity units, 102 geographic component of, 40 magnetostratigraphic classification, lithologic component of, 40^11 definition of, 70 preservation of, 22-23 magnetostratigraphic polarity nannofossils, 54, 55 classification, definition of, 71 natural remanent magnetization (NRM), magnetostratigraphic polarity-reversal 69 horizon, 71 direction of, 69 magnetostratigraphic polarity-transition neostratotype, definition of, 28 zone, 71 nondipole components, 69 magnetostratigraphic polarity unit, 3, nonlayered lithostratigraphic unit, 37 69-75, 100, 101 North American Stratigraphic Code, 50 definition of, 8, 71 kinds of, 71 offshore drilling, 40 naming of, 73-74 oil sands, 36 procedures for establishing, 71-72 ophiolite, use of term, 42 procedures for extending, 72 Oppel zone, 63 terminology for, 74, 75 (Fig. 12) orebearing reefs, 36 magnetostratigraphic polarity zone, 71 orogenies, 96-97 magnetostratigraphic unit, 69 overlap zones, 58 definition of, 71 oyster beds, 99

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 212 Index

paleobathymetry, role of fossils in, 54 Precambrian, 2 paleobiogeography, role of fossils in, chronostratigraphic classification, 97 5 4 subdivisions of, 87 paleoceanography, role of fossils in, 54 principal reference section, 37 paleoclimatic changes, 96 procedures, 13-24 paleoclimatologic data, 92 Proterozoic, 83, 87 paleoecology, role of fossils in, 54 publication, 23 paleogeography, 96 paleomagnetic signature, 92 quarry layers, 36 paleontologic logs, 19 Quaternary, 2, 82 paleontology, 93-94 chronostratigraphic units of, 88 Paleozoic, 82 parastratotype, 18, 19, 26 radiation damage, 97 definition of, 28 , 99 partial-range zone, 60 range-overlap zone, 58 peak zone, 64 range zone, 10 (Table 1), 57-58 period, 10 (Table 1), 74 (Table 2), 79 reference locality, 37 (Table 3), 81-82 reference section. See hypostratotype definition of, 81 regressions of the sea, 92, 96 Phanerozoic rock record, incompleteness of, 11 fossils from, 102 systems of, 82 sandstone, 37 (Fig. 3) Phanerozoic Eonothem, 83 sea level changes, eustatic, 96 phosphorite layers, 78 sea-floor-spreading, 70 phylogenetic zone, 62 anomalies, 72 phylozone, 62 sedimentary rocks, 41 physiographic expression, 38 seismic profiles, 1, 19 plate motions, 69 seismic reflections, 1, 39 pleochroic halos, 97 seismic reflectors, 78 polarity sequence, use of term, 50-51 direction of, 73 sequence stratigraphy, 51 mixed, 71, 73 series, 8 (Fig. 1), 10 (Table 1), 79 normal, 69-70, 73 (Table 3), 80-81, 86 (Table 4) reversals of, 69 boundaries of, 80-81 reversed, 69-70, 73 definition of, 80 polarity chron, 74 misuses o f name, 81 polarity megazone, 71 names of, 81 polarity microzone, 71 time span of, 81 polarity-reversal horizon. See , 37 (Fig. 3) magnetostratigraphic polarity- soils, 2 reversal horizon soil-stratigraphic units, 2 polarity subzone, 71, 73, 74 (Table 2) stage, 8 (Fig. 1), 10 (Table 1), 27 (Fig. polarity superzone, 71, 73, 74 (Table 2) 2), 47 (Fig. 4), 78-79, 79 (Table 3) polarity-transition zone. See based on mammalian faunas, 79 magnetostratigraphic polarity- boundaries of, 79 transition zone definition of, 78-79 polarity unit, stratotypes for, 72 marine, 79 polarity zone, 73, 74 (Table 2). See also name of, 80 magnetostratigraphic polarity zone time span of, 79-80

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Index 213

Standard Global Chronostratigraphic stratotectonic units, 45 (Geochronologic) Scale, 18, 19, 46, stratotype, 17-18, 19, 25-30, 84 73, 77-78, 79, 82, 85, 86 (Table 4), acceptability of, 30 90, 91 accessibility of, 29-30 strata, physical interrelations of, 92 assurance of preservation, 29-30 stratigraphic boundaries, 8 (Fig. 1) definition of, 26 stratigraphic classification description of, 29 categories of, 7-9 designation of, 36-37 definition of, 14 expression of concept of, 28-29 principles of, 7-11 for polarity units, 72 national, 4-5 identification of, 29 regional, 4-5 marking of, 29 stratigraphic codes requirements for, 28-30 national, 143-147 subsurface, 30 regional, 143-147 stratum, definition of, 14 stratigraphic condensation, effects of, structural stages, 45 55 subage, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), 80 stratigraphic horizon, definition of, subbiozone, 64 15 definition of, 56 stratigraphic intervals, 91 subchron, 74 stratigraphic nomenclature, definition subchronozone, 74 (Table 2) of, 15 subgroup, definition of, 35 stratigraphic sections, 58 (Fig. 5), 59 subperiod, 86 (Table 4) (Fig. 6), 60 (Figs. 7, 8), 61 (Fig. 9), subseries, 80 62 (Fig. 10), 64 (Fig. 11) substage, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), stratigraphic terminology, 9, 80 10 (Table 1) subsurface units, establishing, 18 definition of, 14 subsynthem, 48 formal, 14 subsystem , 81 informal, 14 subzone. See subbiozone stratigraphic unit suite, use of term, 42 characterization of new, 17-18 superbiozone, 64 correlation with other units, 18 definition of, 56 definition of, 14 superchron, 74 (Table 2) definition of new, 17-18 superchronozone, 74 (Table 2) description of new, 17-18 supergroup, definition of, 35 fossil names for, 66 superseries, 80 genesis of, 18 superstage, 79 (Table 3), 80 geographic component of names of, supersynthem, 48 2 0 -2 1 supersystem, 81 naming of, 17, 19 superzone. See superbiozone procedures for establishing, 17-24 surface, 56 procedures for revising, 17-24 synthem, 10 (Table 1), 47 (Fig. 4), 48, redefinition of, 24 9 6 regional aspects of, 18 system, 10 (Table 1), 79 (Table 3), revision of, 24 81-82, 86 (Table 4) subdivisions of, 21 boundaries of, 81-82 unit-term component of names of, 21 definition of, 81, 82 stratigraphy, definition of, 13 names of, 82

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 214 Index

system (continued) unconformity, 38-39, 92, 96 time span of, 82 angular, 48 definition of, 48 taxon-range zone, 58 (Fig. 5), 84 unconformity-bounded unit, 3, 45-51, boundaries of, 57 100- 101, 102 definition of, 57 definition of, 8, 45, 46 name of, 57-58 hierarchy of, 48-49 tectogenic units, 45 kinds of, 48 tectonic cycles, 45 naming of, 50-51 tectonic episodes, 92 procedures for establishing, 49-50 tectonic stages, 45 procedures for extending, 50 tectonostratigraphic units, 45 relation to other units, 47 (Fig. 4) tectosomes, 45 revision of, 51 tectostratigraphic units, 45 underwater mapping, 40 teilzone, 58 unit-stratotype, 25, 27 (Fig. 2), 29, 37, thanatocoenosis, 54 89 (Fig. 14) thermoluminescence, 97 definition of, 26 tilting, 48 upper boundary-stratotype, 72 time correlation, indicators of, 97 time span, 25 vegetation, distinctive, 39 time-surfaces. See chronostratigraphic volcanic activity, 92 horizon volcanic ash beds, 102 tongue, definition of, 34 volcanic rocks, stratified, 41 tonsteins, 78 topozone, 58 weathering, 48 transgressions of the sea, 92, 96 well, designation of, 19 type area, definition of, 27 well log character, 38 type locality, 25-30, 37 wireline well logs, 1, 19 definition of, 26-27 designation of, 37 zone, 36 type region. See type area definition of, 15 type section. See stratotype zonule, definition of, 56

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 ERRATA

Geological Society of America International Stratigraphic Guide A Guide to Stratigraphic Classification, Terminology, and Procedure Second Edition Amos Salvador, Editor

page 38, second line: .. .is that it HAS essentially... page 71, first line of second paragraph of section C: Magnetostratigraphic polarity zones may consist of [delete (1)] rock bodies with (1) a single polarity. page 81, second and third lines of second paragraph of section d: . t h e terms lower [delete “, middle”] and u pper.are changed to early [delete “, middle”] and . page 105, line 12 of second paragraph: . i n larger type and those THAT have received. page 114, second line of Consecutive-range zone: .b efo re the FIRST appearance o f . page 131, first line: .metamorphic rocks that HAD been exposed. page 134: Polarity [delete “-reversal”] transition-zone.

The term “isochronous” should be replaced with “synchronous” in the following places: page 78, third line of section 3, Chronostratigraphic Unit, and second line of section 4, Chronostrati­ graphic Horizon (Chronohorizon). page 79, two places in line 8 of second paragraph of section b, Boundaries and Stratotypes. page 92, lines 3, 5, 7 (synchroneity), and 13 of first paragraph, and last line of third paragraph (synchroneity). page 93, third line. page 96, first line of second paragraph of section 8, Unconformities. page 97, last line of section 10, Other Indicators (synchroneity). page 99, fourth line from the bottom of the page. page 101, last line of first full paragraph, fifth line of third full paragraph, and fifth line of fourth full paragraph (synchroneity). page 102, second line from the top of the page, last line of second full paragraph, and fifth line of third full paragraph. page 113, second line of Chronostratigraphic horizon (chronohorizon).

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021 International Stratigraphic Guide

Downloaded from http://pubs.geoscienceworld.org/books/book/chapter-pdf/3744769/9780813759388_backmatter.pdf by guest on 29 September 2021